Page 1: Service Manual
SERVICE MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C e-STUDIO3520C/3530C/4520C Model: FC-2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C Publish Date: March, 2008 File No. SME070008E0 R070921E3500-TTEC Ver05_2009-01...
Page 2 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Page 3 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the positions as shown in the figure.
Page 4 Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
Page 5 4. Cautionary Labels During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
4. COPY PROCESS ......................4-1 General Description ......................4-1 4.1.1 Expression of Colors..................4-1 4.1.2 4-Step Copy Process..................4-2 Description of Operation ....................4-3 Functions........................... 4-4 Comparison with e-STUDIO2500C/3500C/3510C............4-13 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 8 Carriage wire / carriage-2 ................7-25 7.6.10 Carriage home position sensor (S6) ..............7-28 7.6.11 Platen sensor (S7) ................... 7-28 7.6.12 SLG board (SLG)..................... 7-28 7.6.13 Scanner unit cooling fan (M30) ................ 7-29 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 9 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (Twin color mode) ..... 8-59 8.7.10 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PS) ........... 8-59 8.7.11 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (XPS)......... 8-59 8.7.12 Toner limit threshold adjustment..............8-60 8.7.13 Screen switchover ................... 8-60 8.7.14 Sharpness adjustment ..................8-61 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 10 11.6.5 Bypass upper guide ..................11-18 11.6.6 Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL1)..............11-18 11.6.7 Bypass paper sensor (S40) ................11-19 11.6.8 Bypass pickup roller..................11-20 11.6.9 Bypass feed roller ..................11-20 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 11 Needle electrode ................... 12-17 12.6.8 Drum ......................12-18 12.6.9 Drum cleaning blade ..................12-20 12.6.10 Drum thermistor (THM1, THM2) ..............12-21 12.6.11 Discharge LED (ERS-Y, ERS-M, ERS-C, ERS-K) ........12-22 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 12 14.3 Functions......................... 14-3 14.4 General description of operation ..................14-5 14.4.1 Printing in the color modes ................14-5 14.4.2 Printing in the black mode ................14-6 14.4.3 Color registration control.................. 14-7 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 13 Separation plate / Fuser belt unit / Heater lamp (center / side / sub) .... 16-23 16.6.10 Fuser belt / Heat roller / Fuser belt guide / Fuser roller ....... 16-30 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 14 19.2 PM Display ........................19-1 19.2.1 General Description ..................19-1 19.2.2 PM Display Conditions..................19-1 19.2.3 PM Display Contents ..................19-2 19.2.4 Counter Clearing....................19-2 19.3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ................. 19-4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 15 21.1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD..............21-1 21.1.1 Hard disk (HDD) ....................21-1 21.1.2 Board cover ..................... 21-2 21.1.3 FAX cover ......................21-3 21.1.4 SYS/HDD cooling fan ..................21-3 21.1.5 SYS board ....................... 21-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 16 24.7 Scanner......................... 24-57 24.8 Printer..........................24-60 25. SETTING MODE (08) ....................25-1 25.1 Classification List of Setting Mode (08)................25-1 25.2 Operating Procedure..................... 25-12 25.3 Process ......................... 25-14 25.4 Scanner......................... 25-34 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 17 26.5 Troubleshooting for the Image ..................26-122 26.5.1 Color deviation..................... 26-122 26.5.2 Uneven pitch and jitter image ..............26-124 26.5.3 Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance......26-126 26.5.4 Background fogging ..................26-127 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 18 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit) ........... 28-32 28.3.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ........28-34 28.3.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)....28-36 28.3.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............28-37 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 19 Adjustment of copy ratio ................28-54 28.5.7 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ..........28-55 29. EXTERNAL COUNTERS .................... 29-1 29.1 Outline..........................29-1 29.2 Signal ..........................29-1 29.3 Notices ..........................29-5 30. PC BOARDS ....................... 30-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS...
Page 21: Feature
The standard capacity of Main memory / Page memory is increased. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/ e-STUDIO2500C/3500C/3510C 3520C/3530C/4520C Main memory 1 GB 512 MB + optional memory (512 MB) Page memory 512 MB 256 MB + optional memory (256 MB) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FEATURE 1 - 1...
Page 23: Specifications/Accessories/Options/Supplies
64 g/m to 280 g/m (17 lb. Bond to 150 lb. Index) LCF (optional) 64 g/m to 105 g/m (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 1...
Page 24 The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. Weight Approx. 121 kg (266.75 lb.) (for NAD and MJD) Approx. 123 kg (271.16 lb.) (for others) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 2...
Page 25: Copy
Leading edges: 5.0 ± 2.0 mm, Trailing edges: 3.0 ± 2.0 mm, Side edges: 3.0 ± 2.0 mm Multiple copying Up to 999 copies: Key in set numbers © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 3...
Page 26 22 (19) 18 (16) 22 (19) COMPUTER A3, LD 18 (16) 18 (16) 18 (16) 18 (16) 305 x 457mm, 17 (15) 320 x 450mm (SRA3) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 4...
Page 27 Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode • Reproduction ratio: 100% * The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 5...
Page 28 * “-” means “Not acceptable”. * When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying. * The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 6...
Page 29 1st drawer. * The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed. * The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES...
Page 30: Print
400 documents per box/folder Number of Page 200 pages per document Capacity of HDD e-Filing 13 GB * When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 8...
Page 31: Internet Fax
Send to FTP Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF Send to E-mail Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF Send to I-Fax TIFF-S Send to PSTN- © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 9...
Page 32: Accessories
Gasket screw 1 pc. * Machine version NAD: North America, Brazil MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 10...
Page 33 ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia CND: China KRD: Korea ARD: Argentina JPD: Japan © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 11...
Page 34: Options
The finisher (MJ-1030) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). • The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1050/C) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 12...
Page 35: Supplies
PS-ZTFC28EC (for Europe) PS-ZTFC28DC (for Australia and Asia) PS-ZTFC28CC (for China) Waste toner box PS-TBFC28 (expect for Europe and China) PS-TBFC28E (for Europe) PS-TBFC28C (for China) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES 2 - 13...
Page 37: Outline Of The Machine
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE Sectional View 3.1.1 Front side-1 B11 B12 B13 F3 F6 D5 D6 D10 D11 Fig. 3-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 1...
Page 38 2nd drawer separation roller Toner (K) Bypass transport roller Temperature/Humidity sensor Bypass pickup roller Waste toner box Bypass feed roller Bypass separation roller e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 2...
Page 40 Recovery blade (C) Paper clinging detection sensor Main charger unit (C) Discharge LED (C) Developer sleeve (C) Mixer-1 (C) Mixer-2 (C) Auto-toner sensor (C) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 4...
Page 41: Rear Side
3.1.3 Rear side CLT7 CLT1 CLT2 CLT8 CLT3 CLT4 CLT6 CLT5 Fig. 3-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 5...
Page 42 Polygonal motor Mirror motor-M Mirror motor-C Mirror motor-K Fuser motor Exit motor Registration motor Feed/transport motor Tray-up motor ADU motor Waste toner transport motor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 6...
Page 43: Electric Parts Layout
Electric Parts Layout [A] Scanner unit, control panel LT series models P-INV Fig. 3-4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 7...
Page 44 [B] Toner cartridge, waste toner box Y: M2 M: M3 C: M4 K: M5 Y: S8 M: S9 C: S10 K: S11 Fig. 3-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 8...
Page 46 [D] Developer unit Y: ERS-Y M: ERS-M C: ERS-C K: ERS-K THM2 Y: S22 M: S23 C: S24 K: S25 THM1 Fig. 3-7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 10...
Page 48 [F] Fuser unit THM5 THM4 THMO3 LAMP3 THM3 THMO2 LAMP1 LAMP2 THMP2 LAMP4 THMO1 THMP1 Fig. 3-9 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 12...
Page 50 [H] Paper feeding unit CLT1 CLT2 CLT3 CLT4 CLT6 CLT5 Fig. 3-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 14...
Page 51 Automatic duplexing unit, bypass feed unit CLT7 SOL1 CLT8 Fig. 3-12 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 15...
Page 54: Symbols And Functions Of Various Components
Lifting up the trays in the 1st and 2nd Fig. 3-11 Tray-up motor drawers ADU-MOT Driving the automatic duplexing unit Fig. 3-12 48-18 ADU motor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 18...
Page 55 TR1-SNR Detecting contact/release status of the Fig. 3-6 32-105 1st transfer roller status detection 1st transfer roller for each color sensor © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 19...
Page 56 2nd drawer tray-up sensor the 2nd drawer CST2-EMP-SNR Detecting the presence of paper in the Fig. 3-11 20-30 2nd drawer empty sensor 2nd drawer e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 20...
Page 57 (High speed) speed) CLT2 CST1-TR-L-CLT Driving the transport roller of the 1st Fig. 3-11 17-11 1st drawer transport clutch (Low drawer (Low speed) speed) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 21...
Page 58: Pc Boards
11-3 Laser driving PC board-C (LDR-C board) LDR-K PWA-F-LDR-K Driving the K laser diode Fig. 3-8 11-3 Laser driving PC board-K (LDR-K board) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 22...
Page 59 Fig. 3-14 12-22 Scanner damp heater (Left) of the carriage SCN-DH-R Preventing condensation of the lens Fig. 3-14 12-32 Scanner damp heater (Right) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 23...
Page 60 Fig. 3-13 High-voltage transformer it to the following sections • Main charger needle electrode • Main charger grid • Developer bias • Transfer bias e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 24...
Page 61 Generating DC voltage and supplying it Fig. 3-13 Switching regulator to each section of the equipment Preventing overcurrent to the Fig. 3-13 8-106 Breaker equipment © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 25...
Page 63: Disassembly And Replacement Of Covers
Take off the inner tray.  P.3-27 "3.5.2 Inner tray" Tray back cover Remove 1 screw and take off the tray back cover. Fig. 3-18 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 27...
Page 64: Front Upper Cover
Remove 2 screws and take off the TBU lifting lever. TBU lifting lever Fig. 3-20 Release 2 latches and take off the front right cover. Front right cover Fig. 3-21 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 28...
Page 65: Left Upper Cover
Left lower cover Open the waste toner cover. Remove 6 screws and take off the left lower cover. Left lower cover Fig. 3-24 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 29...
Page 66: Left Rear Cover
Right upper cover Fig. 3-26 3.5.11 Right rear cover Remove 2 screws and take off the right rear cover. Right rear cover Fig. 3-27 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 30...
Page 67: Right Rear Hinge Cover
Pull out the upper and lower drawers. Remove 2 screws and take off the right front hinge cover. Right front hinge cover Fig. 3-30 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 31...
Page 68: Bypass Rear Cover
Take off the right upper cover.  P.3-30 "3.5.10 Right upper cover" Remove 2 screws and take off the upper rear cover. Upper rear cover Fig. 3-33 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 32...
Page 69: Rear Cover-1
Take off the rear cover-2.  P.3-33 "3.5.19 Rear cover-2" Rear cover-3 Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover-3. Fig. 3-36 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 33...
Page 70: Waste Toner Cover
3.5.21 Waste toner cover Open the waste toner cover. Take off the waste toner cover. Waste toner cover Fig. 3-37 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 - 34...
Page 71: Copy Process
This equipment has accomplished to improve reproducibility by adding black toner to the mixture of the above three colors at proper ratio. Yellow Green Black Magenta Cyan Blue [ Three primary colors ] Fig. 4-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 1...
Page 72: Step Copy Process
Developer unit 2nd transfer roller EPU ( Y ) EPU ( C ) Laser optical unit EPU ( M ) EPU ( K ) Fig. 4-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 2...
Page 73: Description Of Operation
↓ ↓ (11) (–) Discharging: Eliminates the residual (–) charge from the surface of the photoconductive drum. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 3...
Page 74: Functions
Time ( t ) Colored area of original -500 White area of original Discharge Charging -1000 process process Electric potential of the photoconductive drum Fig. 4-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 4...
Page 75 Light Scanning section control PC board Difference between "light " and "dark" is divided into 256 steps. Image processing section Dark Fig. 4-7 Fig. 4-8 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 5...
Page 76 Image processing section Laser driving PC board Polygonal mirror Semiconductor laser element Drum-Y Drum-M Drum-C Drum-K Fig. 4-9 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 6...
Page 77 Image is developed by toner - 300V When the (–) potential of the photoconductive drum is lower than - 200V the developer bias. - 100V Fig. 4-12 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 7...
Page 78 2. Toner scattering occurs. 3. Background fogging occurs. Solution: Replace the developer material. Toner Carrier Where toner is caked, no frictional electrification occurs. Fig. 4-14 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 8...
Page 79 In the copy process of this equipment, images are transferred in the order of Y→ M→ C→ K on the transfer belt. 1st transfer roller Transfer belt Transfer belt Toner Photoconductive drum Fig. 4-16 Fig. 4-17 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 9...
Page 80 The paper is subjected to the heat and pressure when passing through the fuser belt and the pressure roller. ↓ (Fusing) The toner on the paper is fused to it. Pressure roller Pressure Separation Fuser belt roller Fuser roller Fig. 4-19 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 10...
Page 81 The toner removed is then caught by the conductive recovery blade in order to prevent the toner from scattering to outside of the cleaner. Conductive recovery blade Drum rotation Cleaning blade Fig. 4-21 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 11...
Page 82 (+) charge is eliminated by the conductive blade as mentioned in 9)). ↓ Preparation for the next copying process is completed. Photoconductive drum Discharge LED array Fig. 4-22 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 12...
Page 83: Comparison With E-Studio2500C/3500C/3510C
← Transfer Discharging by the conductive charge recovery blade removal ← 9. Transfer belt cleaning Blade cleaning ← 10.Discharge LED array (red) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C COPY PROCESS 4 - 13...
Page 84 280 W x 1 (100 V series) 350 W x 1 (200 V series) ← Cleaning None ← Heater ON/OFF control and power temperature control by thermistor ← Heater Heater lamp e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved COPY PROCESS 4 - 14...
Page 85: General Operation
Operation of equipment Operation during initializing, pre-running and ready Drawer feed copying by the [ START ] button Copying operation Bypass feed copying Interrupt copying © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 1...
Page 86: Description Of Operation
→ When no button is pressed for a certain period of time, - Set number “1” and reproduction ratio “100%” are displayed. Equipment returns to the normal ready state. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 2...
Page 87: Drawer Feed Copying (1St Drawer Paper Feeding)
→ Laser emission (cyan image) → 1st transfer bias (C) turned ON 1st transfer of cyan image (Cyan image is transferred to the transfer belt) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 3...
Page 88 → Drum, fuser unit and developer unit are stopped Fans return to rotate at the normal rotation speed → “READY” is displayed and the equipment enters into ready mode e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 4...
Page 89 Timing chart for copying (A4/LT size, 1 sheet from 1st drawer) 1. Color copy (e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C) Fig. 5-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 5...
Page 93: Bypass Feed Copying
→ “Ready to resume job 1” is displayed. 4. Press the [START] button The copying operation before the interruption is resumed. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 9...
Page 94: Detection Of Abnormality
(E) EPU not installed properly (F) Waste toner box replacement 3. Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main power switch (G) Call for service e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 10...
Page 95: Description Of Abnormality
It is judged that there is paper. OFF: It is judged that there is no paper.  Drawer area of the control panel blinks. (When the drawer is selected) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 11...
Page 96 Bypass misfeed symbol is displayed  The copying operation is disabled.  Solution: The bypass sensor (S40) is turned OFF by removing the paper from the bypass tray. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 12...
Page 97 The registration sensor (S28) is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passed the transport roller.  Paper jam (E120, E200, E210, E300, E330 and E3C0) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 13...
Page 98 [E] EPU not installed properly Disconnection of the connectors of the EPU  “Latch the developer unit” is displayed. Solution: Install the EPU and close the front cover. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 14...
Page 99 Check the error code displayed on the control panel when “Call for service” appears, and handle the abnormality in reference to the error code table.  P.26-2 "26.2 Error Code List" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION...
Page 100: Flow Chart
"C446" "C449" Fuser motor ON "C465" Tray-up motor ON "C466" Drum motor ON "C468" Transfer belt motor ON Drum phasing abnormal? Call for service "CE71" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 16...
Page 101 Call for service temp. abnormal? "C411" "C412" "C413" "C445" "C446" Fuser belt "C449" reached ready "C465" temp. ? "C466" "C468" Fuser motor OFF Tray-up motor OFF READY © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 17...
Page 102: Automatic Feed Copying
Color printed? Exit sensor check leading edge? Paper jam "E010" Exit sensor check trailing edge? Paper jam "E020" Transport motor OFF Exit motor OFF READY READY e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 18...
Page 103 Laser emission ( cyan image ) Transfer belt motor OFF Discharge LED OFF 1st transfer ( cyan image ) Recovery blade bias OFF Processing system control completed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 19...
Page 104 Drum phasing abnormal? Call for service "CE71" Drum motor OFF Transfer belt motor OFF Discharge LED OFF Recovery blade bias OFF Processing system control completed e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved GENERAL OPERATION 5 - 20...
Page 105: Control Panel
Also, the [ON/OFF] button can be used in the following manner for example: press the [ON/OFF] button while holding down the [0] and [5] buttons simultaneously to activate the Adjustment Mode (05). Fig. 6-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL...
Page 106: Items Shown On The Display Panel
Displays error code, paper jam position and paper jam release guidance, etc. Error code Message Guidance for clearing paper jams Paper jam symbols Fig. 6-3 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 2...
Page 107: Message
(Performing Auto control adjustment Calibration) • Scanning is enable. Ready for bypass feeding Paper is set on the bypass tray COPYING At the copying state © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 3...
Page 108 Displayed when the size of insertion insert2 sheets as the sheet (sheet 2) is different from that originals of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 4...
Page 109 Displayed when confirming the user store original(s) to print out the data as much as Will you print out stored stored at memory - full state originals? © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 5...
Page 110 Set standard size Displayed when the paper size which Reset the paper size is not acceptable is set (depends on the setting) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 6...
Page 111 10,000 sheets) detection error, breakage or poor connection of the needle electrode cleaner detection sensor. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 7...
Page 112: Relation Between The Equipment State And Operator's Operation
Display not Display not Display not Switches to energy Energy saving SAVER] button changed changed changed saving mode mode is cleared and displays BASIC screen e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 8...
Page 113 “COPYING” “COPYING” and mode is cleared original set on RADF starts and RADF RADF starts and displays RADF feeding starts feeding feeding BASIC screen © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 9...
Page 114: Description Of Operation
* CCFL: Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp 2. Block diagram Inverter Backlight R0 - R5 G0 - G5 B0 - R5 Panel Controller V-Sync H-Sync X Driver Enab Fig. 6-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 10...
Page 115 Analog Touch panel input UART Decoder Panel processing Serial data Hard-key matrix LED driver Buzzer LED drive circuit [ON/OFF] Button Main Power LED Fig. 6-6 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 11...
Page 116 B0 - B5 Enab H-sync R0 - R5 G0 - G5 Horizontal non-data area D799 D800 Horizontal non-data area B0 - B5 Enab Fig. 6-7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 12...
Page 117: Led Display Circuit
1. The transistor (Q1) connected to the LED anode is ON. 2. The transistor (Q11) connected to the LED cathode side is ON. The LED is turned ON when 1) and 2) are satisfied. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL...
Page 118: Disassembly And Replacement
6.5.2 Control panel unit Take off the right upper cover.  P.3-30 "3.5.10 Right upper cover" Release the harness from 5 harness clamps. Fig. 6-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 14...
Page 119 Remove 3 screws and take off the cover. Cover Fig. 6-13 Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the control panel Control panel unit unit. Fig. 6-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 15...
Page 120: Panel Inverter Board (P-Inv)
 P.6-14 "6.5.2 Control panel unit" Disconnect 1 connector. Fig. 6-16 Remove 1 screw of the inverter board and disconnect 2 connectors. Panel inverter board Fig. 6-17 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 16...
Page 121 When installing the DSP board, be sure that flat cable is not caught between the DSP board and the sheet. DSP board DSP board Sheet Sheet Flat cable Flat cable Fig. 6-20 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 17...
Page 122: Key Board
Remove 1 screw of the inverter board and disconnect 2 connectors. Panel inverter board Fig. 6-22 Remove 4 screws and take off the hinge bracket. Hinge bracket Fig. 6-23 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTROL PANEL 6 - 18...
Page 123: Control Panel Cover
Remove 2 screws and take off the LCD. Fig. 6-25 6.5.7 Control panel cover Release the 4 latches, and take off the control panel cover. Control panel cover Latch Latch Fig. 6-26 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C CONTROL PANEL 6 - 19...
Page 125: Scanner
Blue). These lines are composed with 3-line color devices and black-and-white device with no filter. Lens RADF original glass Reflector Original glass Exposure lamp Drive pulley Rail for carriage-2 Rail for carriage-1 Carriage-2 SLG board Carriage-1 CCD board Fig. 7-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 1...
Page 126: Construction
Scanning section control PC board (SLG) Carriage home position sensor (S6) Platen sensor (S7) Main switch (SW1) Rubber damper Scanner unit cooling fan (M30) Exposure lamp cooling fan (M32) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 2...
Page 127: Functions
3. Carriage-2 Carriage-2 mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. and directs the reflected light from the mirror-1 through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 3...
Page 128 The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original detection sensors (S1-5) fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage-1. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 4...
Page 129: Description Of Operation
Carriage speed The Carriage speed of the original placed on the original glass in the color mode is the same as that in the black mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 5...
Page 130: Initialization At Power-On
Deceleration Stop Deceleration Stop Meet conditions? Pre-scanning Moving peak detection position Peak detection Completion of initialization Moving carriage waiting position Scanning command Fig. 7-7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 6...
Page 131: Electric Circuit Description
* CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis * High level: Forcibly turning OFF the excitation drive output (Non-excitation state) * Low level: Normal operation state (Excitation state) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER...
Page 132: Exposure Lamp Control Circuit
Original Shading correction plate Exposure lamp ( Xenon lamp ) Lighting device for exposure lamp (Inverter board) CCD sensor SLG board Scanner CCD board Fig. 7-9 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 8...
Page 133 ( 5 ) Fluorescer ( 6 ) Visible light ( irradiated from the opening to outside the pipe ) ( 7 ) Opening ( 8 ) Harness Fig. 7-11 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 9...
Page 134 Exposure lamp enable signal Condition Exposure LAMPON-0 WDTOUT-0 5VSOW-0 LMPEN-0 +5VSW State of equipment lamp Normal operation Scanner CPU overdriving Call for service Abnormality detected (Check sum error) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 10...
Page 135: General Description Of Ccd Control
Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit This circuit detects the size of original (standard sizes only) using the reflection type photosensors arranged on the base frame of the scanner unit. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER...
Page 136 (when scanning black image). [ A4 Series ] [ LT Series ] Original Original glass Original Original glass APS-R APS-R APS-3 APS-3 APS-2 APS-1 APS-C APS-C APS-2 Fig. 7-13 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 12...
Page 137 APS-2 APS-1 APS-2 SLG board SLG board Fig. 7-14 Sensor detection points [A4 Series] APS-R APS-C A5–R B5–R A4–R APS-3 APS-1 APS-2 Fig. 7-15 [LT Series] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 13...
Page 138 A5-R [LT Series] Size judgement APS-C APS-R APS-2 APS-3 LT-R ST-R Code Output signal Original Not available Available * When the platen sensor (S7) is OFF; e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 14...
Page 139 The light emitting diode is driven by a pulse having a 130 µsec. cycle and an 8 µsec. ON time. When the phototransistor receives the same signal as this pulse, it is determined that there is an original. The pulse modulation is performed inside the reflection type phototransistor. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER...
Page 140: Disassembly And Replacement
Take off the original glass.  P.7-16 "7.6.1 Original glass" Remove 6 screws and disconnect 1 Lens cover connector. Take off the lens cover. Fig. 7-20 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 16...
Page 141: Automatic Original Detection Sensor (Aps Sensor)
Take off the original glass and front upper cover.  P.7-16 "7.6.1 Original glass"  P.3-28 "3.5.4 Front upper cover" Move the carriage-1 to the center position. Fig. 7-23 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 17...
Page 142 Fig. 7-26 Remove 1 screw. Exposure lamp Lift up the front side of the exposure lamp and take off by sliding it. Fig. 7-27 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 18...
Page 143: Lens Unit
Fig. 7-29 4. Handle the unit with care. Do not touch the adjusted area and lens. (Hold the unit as the right figure.) Fig. 7-30 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 19...
Page 144 Tighten 4 screws securely to fix the lens unit [ Rear ] while pushing it to the rear side. Screw Screw [ Front ] Fig. 7-32 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 20...
Page 145: Scan Motor (M1)
When installing the scan motor, be sure to perform the belt tension adjustment.  P.7-31 "7.7.2 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor" Screw Fig. 7-34 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 21...
Page 146: Carriage-1
Remove the square seal fixing the lamp Connector Seal harness to the base. Disconnect the connector of the lamp harness from the SLG board. Fig. 7-37 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 22...
Page 147 Then take off the carriage-1. Note: When replacing the mirror-1, replace the carriage-1 together with mirror-1. Mirror-1 should not be removed. Fig. 7-40 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 23...
Page 148 Wire holder jig Wire holder jig Fig. 7-45 Detach the tension springs of the front and rear sides. Tension spring Remove the carriage wires. Tension spring Fig. 7-46 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 25...
Page 149 Wire pulley Hook Tension spring Fig. 7-48 [Rear] Carriage-2 Carriage wire Bracket for carriage-1 Hook Idler pulley Wire pulley Tension spring Fig. 7-49 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 26...
Page 150 2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it. Wire holder jig Fig. 7-52 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 27...
Page 151 Take off the lens cover.  P.7-16 "7.6.2 Lens cover" Disconnect 10 connectors, remove 4 screws and take off the SLG board. SLG board Fig. 7-55 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 28...
Page 152 Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connector. Remove the exposure lamp cooling fan. Fig. 7-57 Note: Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage. Drive pulley Fig. 7-58 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 29...
Page 153: Adjustment Of The Scanner Section
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame. Exit frame [ Rear ] [ Front ] Enlarged view of carriage Fig. 7-60 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SCANNER 7 - 30...
Page 154 Fix screw-B and then -C at the stopped position. Remove the belt tension jig. Pulley Timing belt Scan motor Fig. 7-61 Belt tension jig Fig. 7-62 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SCANNER 7 - 31...
Page 156: General Description
The image processing section inputs the image signal from the scanning control section and applies various image processing on the signal, then transmits the output result to the writing control section. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 157: Configuration
Scanner high quality image processing Printer high quality image processing LGC board ASIC : Image data flow Laser related control LDR board ASIC Laser drive Fig. 8-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 2...
Page 158: Image Processing Pc Board (Img)
By using this function, it is possible to cut the background density down when copying originals which have a certain level of background density, such as newspapers. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 159 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Primary scanning pixel positions Primary scanning pixel positions Fig. 8-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 4...
Page 160 8. Gamma correction This function corrects the input/output characteristics of the scanner/printer and adjusts the image signals so that the input/output characteristics would match with the copy mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 161 This function corrects the image signals scanned by the scanner and reproduces them in a higher image quality. 15.Printer high quality image processing This function reproduces the image signals output from the printer controller in a higher image quality. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 6...
Page 162: System Control Pc Board (Sys)
4. Brightness adjustment (PCL6C) This function adjusts brightness of the printer data. 5. Contrast adjustment (PostScript, PCL6C) The contrast adjustment is applied to the print data. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 7...
Page 163: Image Related Adjustment
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 8...
Page 164 *4: When upgrading firmware, perform the adjustment from 05-396. *5: Use [4] + [FAX] test pattern. *6: Use [70] + [FAX] test pattern. Fig. 8-8 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 9...
Page 165: Adjustment Of The Auto-Toner Sensor
(bit value)” corresponding to the value for initial developer material is displayed in (C), the adjustment is completed. • When the adjustment is completed, the [ENTER] button is displayed on the screen. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 10...
Page 166 The values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity. Press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment result in the memory. Turn the power OFF. Install the toner cartridges. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 11...
Page 167: Performing Image Quality Control
4. Check that “WAIT” is displayed. Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.  P.26-1 "26. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 12...
Page 168 4. Check that “WAIT” is displayed. Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.  P.26-1 "26. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 13...
Page 169: Adjustment Of Color Registration Control
4. Check that “WAIT” is displayed. Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.  P.26-1 "26. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 14...
Page 170: Adjustment Of The Transfer Belt Due To Environmental Factors
If required, perform “Leading edge position adjustment / Common items (05-408)”.  P.14-30 "14.7.1 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 171: Image Dimensional Adjustment
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Image location of secondary scanning direction Top margin Right margin Bottom margin [Procedure to key in adjustment values] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 16...
Page 172 If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, 100% return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment COPYING procedure. Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode. Fig. 8-13 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 17...
Page 173: Paper Alignment At The Registration Roller
Paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted in the following procedure by performing the code 05-480. 1. Select the drawer. Fig. 8-14 2. Select the paper size. Fig. 8-15 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 18...
Page 174 3. Select the media type. Fig. 8-16 4. Select the copy speed. (“45ppm” for black copying in e-STUDIO4520C or “Other” for others) Fig. 8-17 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 19...
Page 175 5. Key in the adjustment value. Fig. 8-18 6. Press the [ENTER] button to finish the adjustment. * Press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button to return to the previous menu. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 20...
Page 176 (77.3 lb. Cover to 94.5 lb. Cover (141.4 lb. Index)) Thick paper 4: 257 to 280 g/m (94.5 lb. Cover to 100 lb. Cover (150 lb. Index)) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 21...
Page 177 If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew, an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to the above and select the appropriate value. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 22...
Page 178: Image Dimensional Adjustment At The Printing Section
Refer to “[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position” 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing” © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 23...
Page 179 → Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 24...
Page 180 (copy/printer/Fax) or at each speed (normal speed/reduced speed/high speed). The speed of the transfer belt motor is also adjusted. Therefore, use the above default value other than the sub code “0,” unless otherwise required. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 181 → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.10 mm/ step). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 26...
Page 182 05-428 (4th drawer, A4/LT) 05-442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT) 05-445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) E: 05-498-0 (2nd drawer, A3/LD), 05-498-1 (1st drawer, A4/LT) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 27...
Page 183: Image Dimensional Adjustment At The Scanning Section
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 28...
Page 184 Product name: 1401E The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1.  P.8-34 " Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 185 → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.02 mm/ step). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 30...
Page 186 → (Key in a value (acceptable values: 68 to 188)) → [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.08 mm/step). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 31...
Page 187 “in the plus direction” in order to prevent paper jamming. Range of top margin adjustment (e.g.) Function Black Color Copy 3.0 - 5.0 mm 5.0 - 7.0 mm e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 32...
Page 188 → (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). Feeding direction Fig. 8-25 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 33...
Page 189 Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1 Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1. 1. Points to be measured in the chart e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 34...
Page 190 A: 05-405 → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step) B: 05-306 → 5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) C: 05-340 → 150±0.5 mm (0.02 mm/step) D: 05-305 → 10±0.5 mm (0.08 mm/step) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 35...
Page 191 : For checking reproduction of text [13] Thin lines : For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm) [14] Note area : For recording the date, conditions, etc. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 36...
Page 192: Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
Place the chart aligning its side with 2 black squares against the original scale. Key in a code and press the [START] button. → The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx.30 sec.). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 37...
Page 193 Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 38...
Page 194: Density Adjustment
Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 195: Color Balance Adjustment
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 40...
Page 196 No. TCC-1 chart can be used as a guide for the range of the density area influenced by the change of the adjustment value (low density, medium density, high density). Low density Medium density High density Fig. 8-29 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 41...
Page 197: Gamma Balance Adjustment
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing  P.8-37 "8.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment". The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-40 "8.6.3 Color balance adjustment". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 42...
Page 198: Background Adjustment
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-39 "8.6.2 Density adjustment". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 43...
Page 199: Judgment Threshold For Acs (Common For Copy And Scan)
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness. The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-39 "8.6.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 44...
Page 200: Setting Range Correction
The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-39 "8.6.2 Density adjustment". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 45...
Page 201: Color Adjustment Of Marker
Turn the power OFF and back ON in the normal mode. Then make a copy in the one touch adjustment “MARKER” mode. If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 46...
Page 202: Beam Level Conversion Setting
3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not increase this order when setting the values. 4. Usually, beam level 4 / 4 is most effective on black mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 203: Maximum Toner Density Adjustment To Paper Type
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing  P.8-37 "8.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment". The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-39 "8.6.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 48...
Page 204: Text/Photo Reproduction Level Adjustment
The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is “1”. The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-39 "8.6.2 Density adjustment". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 205: Black Header Density Level Adjustment
The larger the value is, the more an original tends adjustment for blank to be judged as a blank sheet. originals Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 50...
Page 206: Background Offsetting Adjustment For Adf
The larger the value is, the lower the background density becomes. Acceptable Mono Color 7765 values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Twin Color 7766 mode ACS Black 7675 Black 7025 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 51...
Page 207: Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
Used when the code 1004-6 is performed Special paper 1 Used when the code 1004-7 is performed Special paper 2 Used when the code 1004-8 is performed e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 52...
Page 209: Gamma Balance Adjustment (Black Mode)
Let the equipment restart and perform the printing job. If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 54...
Page 210 (low density, medium density, high density). density Medium density High density Fig. 8-30 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 55...
Page 211: Color Balance Adjustment
(low density, medium density, high density (Refer to P.8-55 "Fig. 8-30"). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 56...
Page 212: Adjustment Of Faint Text
The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-54 "8.7.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 57...
Page 213: Maximum Toner Density Adjustment
8212-3 Image becomes. Acceptable values: 1 to 255 The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-54 "8.7.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 58...
Page 214: Pureblack/Puregray" Threshold Adjustment (Twin Color Mode)
Acceptable values: 1 to 255 The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-54 "8.7.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 59...
Page 215: Toner Limit Threshold Adjustment
(EFI Printer Board) 1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image) The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-57 "8.7.4 Adjustment of faint text". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 60...
Page 216: Sharpness Adjustment
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (default: 128) The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-54 "8.7.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 61...
Page 217: Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job. If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 62...
Page 218: Density Adjustment
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning. If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 63...
Page 219: Background Adjustment (Color Mode)
Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70) : The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-63 "8.8.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 64...
Page 220: Sharpness Adjustment
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness. The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-63 "8.8.2 Density adjustment". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 65...
Page 221: Setting Range Correction
1: Background peak - varied 8361 8362 8363 8365 Range correction (Manual density adjustment) The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-63 "8.8.2 Density adjustment". e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 66...
Page 222: Fine Adjustment Of Black Density
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job. If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 67...
Page 223: Adjustment Of Saturation
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job. If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 68...
Page 224: Background Processing Offset Adjustment
The smaller the value is, the higher the density of them becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) The procedure is the same as that of  P.8-63 "8.8.2 Density adjustment". © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 69...
Page 225: Image Quality Adjustment (Fax Function)
Turn the power OFF. If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's side. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved IMAGE PROCESSING 8 - 70...
Page 226: Beam Level Conversion Setting
1. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not increase this order when setting the values. 2. Usually, beam level 4 / 4 is most effective on black mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE PROCESSING...
Page 228: Laser Optical Unit
The unit must not be disassembled in the field as they are very sensitive to dust and finely adjusted at the factory. The polygonal motor in e-STUDIO3530C/4520C is different from the one in e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/ 2830C/3520C, and rotates faster. In order to avoid effects by the consequently increased heat and current, in e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, the driving PC board is placed outside the laser unit instead of being unified with the polygonal motor.
Page 229 Aperture (Y) Fine focus lens (C) Fine focus lens (Y) Aperture (C) Laser diode (Y) Cylinder lens (C) Laser driving PC board (Y) Fig. 9-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 2...
Page 230: Structure
The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the front right cover. Fig. 9-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 3...
Page 231 (C). One scan is performed on one plane of the polygonal mirror. Eight scans can be made with one rotation of the polygonal mirror. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 4...
Page 232 (every 10k copies) prompting a user to clean the glass. Ask a user to perform cleaning when it appears. Although the slit glass cleaning pad is not a preventive maintenance part, replace it if it becomes dirty. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT...
Page 233 With the Y color scanning line as a standard, a mirror motor installed at each of the M, C and K color beam mirrors is driven to adjust the degree of laser beam parallelization by inclining the mirror. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 6...
Page 234: Electric Circuit Description
Power source Laser power Semiconductive laser Laser driver comparison circuit circuit Constant optical output Monitor efficiency Monitor output regulation circuit Fig. 9-9 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 7...
Page 235: Polygonal Motor Control Circuit
High level Low level PMMTR Motor ON signal PMCK Reference clock PMRDY PLL control signal Stopping or error Locked (Rotating at a constant speed) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 8...
Page 236: Mirror Motor Control Circuit
IC61 Mirror motor-K IC83 TILTK Fig. 9-11 Control signal Status Signal Function High level Low level TILT0/1/2/3 Mirror motor phase signal TILTM/C/K Enable signal © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 9...
Page 237 Motor to be driven TILTM TILTC TILTK Mirror motor-M Mirror motor-C Mirror motor-K None (No tilt adjustment) * Not available in the above combination e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 10...
Page 238: Disassembly And Replacement
Take off the front hinge lower cover. Front hinge lower cover Fig. 9-13 Remove 2 screws and take off the inner cover. Inner cover Fig. 9-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 11...
Page 239 Remove 2 screws and take off the waste toner transport motor. Fig. 9-15 Disconnect 2 connectors. Fig. 9-16 Remove 2 screws. Fig. 9-17 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 12...
Page 240 (the cover) where the slit glass and the polygonal Fig. 9-20 motor are installed with your hands or other things. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 13...
Page 241: Shutter Unit
Remove 7 screws and take off the metal plate on the left side. Note: Plate Check printed images after assembling the unit. Fig. 9-23 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 14...
Page 242: Shutter Motor (M12)
Remove the E-ring. Then remove 1 gear, 1 spring and 1 polyslider. Note: Gear When assembling the unit, be sure to install the polyslider. Spring Polyslider Fig. 9-26 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 15...
Page 243: Shutter Status Detection Sensor (S20)
Remove 1 clip, and then slide the actuator to the rear side. Actuator Note: Be sure not to lose the removed pin. Clip Fig. 9-29 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 16...
Page 244: Slit Glass Cleaning Pad
Fig. 9-31 9.4.6 Polygonal motor Note: Polygonal motor replacement is not recommended in the field; the image quality is not guaranteed in such a case. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 17...
Page 245 Connector Note: Check that all 4 fixing screws for the polygonal motor contact the base before fixing the motor. Polygonal motor Fig. 9-34 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved LASER OPTICAL UNIT 9 - 18...
Page 246: Image Adjustment In Laser Optical Unit
 P.8-24 "[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)"  P.8-26 "[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position"  P.8-27 "[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C LASER OPTICAL UNIT...
Page 248: Drive System
• 2nd drawer tray ADU motor (M22) ADU (Upper, middle and lower transport roller) Ch.17. Waste toner transport motor Waste toner transport auger Ch.13. (M31) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DRIVE SYSTEM 10 - 1...
Page 250: Paper Feeding System
Registration roller (rubber roller) 1st drawer detection switch (SW5) Registration roller (metal roller) 2nd drawer detection switch (SW6) Bypass paper sensor (S40) Registration sensor (S28) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 1...
Page 251: Composition
Bypass pickup solenoid SOL1 Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board Bypass feed clutch CLT8 Feed/transport motor Registration motor Registration roller Registration sensor Tray-up motor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 2...
Page 252: Functions
13.Feed clutch (1st drawer (CLT3) / 2nd drawer (CLT6) / Bypass (CLT8)) This is a clutch used to transmit the drive from the feed/transport motor to the drawer pickup roller and drawer feed roller. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM...
Page 253 20.Paper width detection board (SFB) This sensor works directly with the sidewalls of the bypass tray to detect the paper width on the tray. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 4...
Page 254: Description Of Operation
Bypass feed clutch ( CLT8 ) Bypass feed roller Bypass pickup roller Registration motor ( M19 ) Registration roller Tray-up motor ( M21 ) Trays in 1st/2nd drawer © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 5...
Page 255: Operation Of Bypass Pickup Roller
The roller is rotated by this driving force. Bypass pickup solenoid Spring Pickup roller Lever Pickup arm Fig. 11-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 6...
Page 256: Operation Of Drawer Pickup Roller
A. The pickup roller and roller holder are then lowered by it's own weight. Insertion direction Lever (a) Pickup roller Fig. 11-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 7...
Page 257: Separation Of Paper
OFF, and the tray is stopped. At this time, if the empty sensor (S32) is OFF (L), it is judged that there is no paper in the drawer. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 8...
Page 258 • The registration motor (M19) is turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd transfer position. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 9...
Page 259 • The registration motor (M19) and transport clutch (low speed) (CLT2) are turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd transfer position. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 10...
Page 260: Electric Circuit Description
Stop CW (Tray-up of 2nd drawer) CCW (Tray-up of 1st drawer) Brake * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 11...
Page 261: Registration Motor Control Circuit
Enable signal RGMCW Rotation direction signal STMRST Reset signal Normal operation Reset * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 12...
Page 262: Feed/Transport Motor Control Circuit
* When the rotation speed of the motor is set to a low speed, FDMGA signal is changed to a low level to suppress the rotation fluctuation of the motor. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 263: Disassembly And Replacement
When installing the bypass unit, make sure that the ADU is closed in advance since the bypass unit occasionally does not slide smoothly. Bypass unit Fig. 11-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 14...
Page 264: Hinge Assembly
Fig. 11-13 Remove 2 screws, and then take off the hinge by sliding it. Hinge assembly Fig. 11-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 15...
Page 265: Sfb Board (Sfb)
Remove 1 screw for the leaf spring. And remove 1 screw on the tray side and take off Bracket the bracket. Leaf spring Fig. 11-17 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 16...
Page 266: Bypass Feed Upper Cover
 P.11-14 "11.6.1 Bypass unit" Bypass feed upper cover Remove 1 screw and slide the bypass feed upper cover to take it off. Fig. 11-20 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 17...
Page 267: Bypass Upper Guide
Remove 1 spring. Disconnect 1 connector and take off the bypass pickup solenoid with the solenoid arm. Bypass pickup solenoid Solenoid arm Fig. 11-23 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 18...
Page 268: Bypass Paper Sensor (S40)
Fig. 11-25 Disconnect the connector from the sensor and release the latch to take off the bypass paper sensor. Bypass paper sensor Fig. 11-26 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 19...
Page 269: Bypass Pickup Roller
Fig. 11-28 5. Install the bypass pickup roller and the bypass feed roller in the correct direction. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 20...
Page 270: Bypass Transport Roller
Remove the bushing and the bypass feed Bracket-2 clutch. Note: Match the protruding portion of the clutch and bracket for assembling. Bushing Bypass feed clutch Bracket-1 E-ring Fig. 11-31 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 21...
Page 271: Bypass Separation Roller
Detach the cover, the arbor, and the clutch spring from the shaft, and then take off the Arbor Shaft bypass separation roller. Clutch spring Cover Bypass separation roller Fig. 11-34 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 22...
Page 272: Bypass Feed Sensor (S41)
Be careful not to come off the sensor arm and the sensor spring after taking off the sensor. Sensor spring Sensor arm Bypass feed sensor Fig. 11-37 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 23...
Page 273: Drawer Feeding Unit
Pull up the paper stock sensor arm. Disconnect the connector and release the latch to take off the paper stock sensor. Sensor arm Fig. 11-40 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 24...
Page 274: Separation Roller
Detach the cover, the arbor and the clutch spring from the shaft, and then takeoff the Arbor separation roller. Cover Separation roller Shaft Arbor Clutch spring Fig. 11-43 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 25...
Page 275: Feed Roller
Belt Fig. 11-45 Remove 3 E-rings, pulley, one-way clutch and take off the pickup roller. E-ring One-way clutch Pickup roller E-ring Pulley Fig. 11-46 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 26...
Page 276: Drawer Feed Clutch (Clt3/Clt6)
Take off the filter bracket.  P.21-8 "21.1.10 FIL board" Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 4 screws and take off the tray drive unit. Tray drive unit Fig. 11-49 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 27...
Page 277 Take off the tray-up motor. Tray-up motor Fig. 11-51 Note: Match the boss of the gear with the hole of the cover when installing the motor. Fig. 11-52 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 28...
Page 278: Tray Drive Unit
Take off the bracket, shaft, gear and 2 bushings. Note: When assembling the clutch, match the protruded portion of the clutch with the position shown in the figure. Fig. 11-55 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 29...
Page 279: St Drawer Detection Switch (Sw5) / 2Nd Drawer Detection Switch (Sw6)
Note: Paper feed guide assembly When installing the assembly, be sure not to deform the Mylar on the transport path. Fig. 11-57 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 30...
Page 280: Side Cover Switch (Sw4)
A by sliding it. Fig. 11-59 Disconnect 1 connector, and then release 2 latches to take off the side cover switch. Side cover switch Fig. 11-60 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 31...
Page 281: Registration Guide
Cover Fig. 11-62 Remove the spring by releasing the front side hook, and remove the wire and cam. Projection Spring Fig. 11-63 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 32...
Page 282 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws. Then take off the registration guide. Note: The outer 2 of these 3 screws are stepped screws. Registration guide Fig. 11-66 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 33...
Page 283: Registration Sensor (S28)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the 1st drawer feed sensor with its bracket. 1st drawer feed sensor Fig. 11-69 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 34...
Page 284: Registration Roller (Rubber)
Holder Fig. 11-71 Take off the registration roller (rubber) with its holder. Registration roller ( Rubber ) Fig. 11-72 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 35...
Page 285: Registration Motor Unit
Take off the registration motor unit.  P.11-39 "11.6.37 1st drawer transport Plate clutch (Low speed) (CLT2)" Remove 3 screws to take off the plate. Fig. 11-75 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 36...
Page 286: Registration Roller (Metal)
 P.11-36 "11.6.33 Registration motor unit" Take off the registration guide.  P.11-32 "11.6.29 Registration guide" Take off the middle guide. Middle guide Fig. 11-78 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 37...
Page 287 Remove 2 screws, and then take off the duct. Duct Fig. 11-80 Remove 1 screw, and then take off the cover. Cover Fig. 11-81 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 38...
Page 288: Paper Dust Holder
(Low speed). Note: When assembling the clutch, match the protruded portion of the clutch with the position shown in the figure. Fig. 11-84 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 39...
Page 289: Feed/Transport Motor (M20)
1st drawer bracket. transport clutch Remove the shaft and gear from the 1st ( High speed ) drawer transport clutch (High speed). Fig. 11-87 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 40...
Page 290: St Drawer Transport Roller
Remove 2 clips, and then take off the 2nd drawer transport roller by moving it to the rear side slightly. 2nd drawer transport roller Fig. 11-90 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 41...
Page 291: Adjustment Of The Paper Feeding System
The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. → Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B) • direction in the lower figure). [ Rear ] Feeding direction Center [ Front ] Fig. 11-92 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 42...
Page 292 1. Loosen 2 screws. 2. Move the entire guide to the front or rear side. 3. Tighten the screws. ( B ) ( A ) Fig. 11-94 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM 11 - 43...
Page 294: Process Unit Related Section
Conductive recovery blade Toner recovery auger Cleaning blade Discharge LED Ozone duct Drum thermistor Main charger unit Main charger grid Needle electrode Fig. 12-2 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 1...
Page 295: Composition
Discharge LED ERS-Y, -M, -C, -K Temperature/Humidity sensor Ozone filter-1, -2 PM parts Ozone exhaust fan High-voltage transformer Drum motor Drum switching motor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 2...
Page 296: Functions
Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter. The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone. 8. Ozone exhaust fan (M24) This fan exhausts air through the ozone filter-1. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 3...
Page 297 The actuator (disk) installed in the same shaft as the driving gear of the K drum and C drum detects the position of their drums to match the phase. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 4...
Page 298: Description Of Operation
Drive is transmitted to each drum as shown below. Drive transmission gear Row of gears Coupling Drum-Y Drum-M Drum-C Drum-K K drum phase sensor Color drum phase sensor Fig. 12-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 5...
Page 299 When a cover is closed • When starting 04 mode • When starting 05 mode or starting printing • Before performing the enforced color registration adjustment (05-4719) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 6...
Page 300: Electric Circuit Description
( Y/M/C/K ) HVTDDCC/K IC60 ASIC HVTTR1Y/M/C/K 2nd transfer 2nd transfer bias facing roller HVTTR2 HVTECC/K Recovery blade Cleaner bias ( Y/M/C/K ) Fig. 12-5 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 7...
Page 301 This signal detects the abnormality (leakage) of the high-voltage transformer output. When the abnormality is detected, the signal moves to a low level. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 8...
Page 302: Drum Temperature Detection Circuit
Therefore, when the temperature becomes higher, the input voltage to the A/D converter becomes lower. LGC board +3.3V YDRTH Drum thermistor-Y IC49 Engine CPU +3.3V KDRTH Drum thermistor-K Fig. 12-6 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 9...
Page 303: Drum Motor Control Circuit
Enable signal DMDIR Rotation direction signal STMRST Reset signal Normal operation Reset * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 10...
Page 304: Drum Switching Motor Control Circuit
OFF (high impedance) Stop CW (Gear engaged) CCW (Gear disengaged) Brake * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 11...
Page 305: Disassembly And Replacement
When installing, wipe out toner on the drawer connector of the equipment because toner attached on the contacts of the connector will cause conduction blockage. Connector Fig. 12-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 12...
Page 306: Process Cover
Figure to avoid the damage on the drum. • When installing, be sure not to have harnesses being loosened. Connector Fig. 12-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 13...
Page 307 1 boss of the waste toner drain Boss into respective boss holes securely. Hole Boss Waste toner Hole Boss discharge section Fig. 12-16 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 14...
Page 308: Cleaning Unit/ Developer Unit
Avoid a direct sunlight onto the drum. Main charger assembly Move it to a dark place as soon as it is taken off. Fig. 12-19 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 15...
Page 309: Main Charger Cleaner
Attach the main charger cleaner with its sides contacting the rib of the main charger cleaner rod as indicated by arrows shown in the figure. Fig. 12-22 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 16...
Page 310: Main Charger Grid
• Do not twist the needle electrode. Fig. 12-25 • Do not touch the needle electrode directly with bare hands. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 17...
Page 312 Fig. 12-30 2. Install the sleeve with its groove aligned with the pin on the drum shaft. Groove Sleeve Drum shaft Fig. 12-31 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 19...
Page 313: Drum Cleaning Blade
Blade the figure (by slightly pushing them to the Felt direction of the arrows). Blade Fig. 12-34 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 20...
Page 314: Drum Thermistor (Thm1, Thm2)
 P.12-12 "12.6.1 Process unit (EPU)"  P.12-15 "[A] Cleaning unit/ Developer unit" Remove 1 screw and take off the drum thermistor. Drum thermistor Fig. 12-35 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 21...
Page 315: Discharge Led (Ers-Y, Ers-M, Ers-C, Ers-K)
 P.12-22 "12.6.11 Discharge LED (ERS-Y, ERS-M, ERS-C, ERS-K)" Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch, and take off the needle electrode cleaner detection sensor. Fig. 12-38 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 22...
Page 316: Drum Drive Unit
Disconnect the 1 connector and 2 relay connectors. Remove 3 screws and take off the drum drive unit. Relay connector Fig. 12-40 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 23...
Page 317: Drum Motor (M10)
Take off the Drum drive unit.  P.12-23 "12.6.13 Drum drive unit" Drum drive unit Remove 2 screws and take off the drum motor. Drum motor Fig. 12-41 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 24...
Page 318: Drum Switching Motor (M11)
If the guide does not move properly, check if there is anything wrong with the guide or the plate. Guide Fig. 12-44 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 25...
Page 319: Drum Switching Detection Sensor (S19)
When installing, take care of the direction of the spring. • Be careful not to damage the gear of the drum drive unit. Fig. 12-47 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 26...
Page 320 Disconnect 1 connector, and then release the latch to take off the drum switching Connector detection sensor. Drum switching detection sensor Fig. 12-50 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 27...
Page 321: K Drum Phase Sensor (S44)
Actuator Gear same direction as the concave indentation of the gear. Gear Actuator Fig. 12-53 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION 12 - 28...
Page 322: Adjustment Of The Process Unit Related Section
Also do not perform the setting change when the high-voltage power supply is replaced. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PROCESS UNIT RELATED SECTION...
Page 324: Developer Unit
Developer unit ( Y ) Developer unit ( C ) Developer unit ( M ) Developer unit ( K ) Waste toner box Fig. 13-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 1...
Page 325: Composition
S22, 23, 24, 25 Developer unit motor Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) Drum Developer filter Doctor blade Developer unit Auto-toner sensor Mixer-2 Mixer-1 Main charger Fig. 13-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 2...
Page 326: Functions
When the Waste toner paddle motor is locked by the Waste toner paddle motor lock detection sensor (S14), “Reboot the machine” appears. Also, if it is detected twice in a row, a service call (CD70) occurs. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT...
Page 327 This switch detects opening/closing of the waste toner cover. This has also a structure in which the cover cannot be closed if no toner box has been installed. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 4...
Page 328: Electrical Circuit Description
(Temp) IC64 IC48 ADCDI-1C ASIC converter HMS-1C (Hum) IC65 Fig. 13-3 Control signal Signal Function TEMP-1C Temperature detection signal (analog) HMS-1C Humidity detection signal (analog) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 5...
Page 329: Toner Motor Control Circuit
High level Low level YTNMT Toner motor-Y ON signal MTNMT Toner motor-M ON signal Stop Rotate CTNMT Toner motor-C ON signal KTNMT Toner motor-K ON signal e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 6...
Page 330: Waste Toner Transport Motor Control Circuit
IC60 TNTRMT ASIC Fig. 13-5 Control signal Status Signal Function High level Low level TNTMRMT Waste toner transport motor ON Stop Rotate signal © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 7...
Page 331: Waste Toner Paddle Motor Control Circuit
PDLMT paddle motor ASIC IC76 Fig. 13-6 Control signal Status Signal Function High level Low level PDLMT Waste toner paddle motor ON Stop Rotate signal e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 8...
Page 332: Auto-Toner Circuit
A/D converter Toner density signal Auto-toner sensor Developer unit IC60 Developer material IC34 Control voltage signal ASIC converter IC64 Temperature/humidity sensor converter Fig. 13-7 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 9...
Page 333 → Supplies toner from the toner cartridge. → Output of the auto-toner sensor changes. → Toner density recovers to its normal value. → “Toner-empty” is cleared. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 10...
Page 334 When the toner density is high: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material increased → Magnetic resistance increased → Detection output decreased → Auto-toner output ATSN decreased © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 11...
Page 335: Disassembly And Replacement
Push the protrusions on the both edges of the developer filter in the direction of the arrow, and then take off the developer filter by sliding it. Developer filter Fig. 13-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 12...
Page 336: Developer Material
The latch shown in the figure F is also released accordingly. Latch Fig. 13-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 13...
Page 337 Rotate the knob in the direction described in the figure until the developer adheres on the surface of the developer sleeve evenly. Developer sleeve Knob Fig. 13-18 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 14...
Page 338 Check if the developer does not adhered to the joint of the upper cover indicated in the figure. Connecting point of upper cover Fig. 13-22 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 15...
Page 339 Note: After the installation, check that all the protrusions and latches are fitted and locked securely. Latch Fig. 13-25 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 16...
Page 340: Doctor Blade
Fig. 13-26 Side seal (Rear) Side seal (Rear) Rear side Fig. 13-27 Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade. Doctor blade Fig. 13-28 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 17...
Page 341 (by slightly pushing it to the direction of the arrow). Fig. 13-29 Side seal (Rear) Fig. 13-30 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 18...
Page 342: Auto-Toner Sensor (S22, S23, S24, S25)
Hold the locking part to lift it up, and then turn the auto-toner sensor counterclockwise for Locking part 90 degrees to take it off. Auto-toner sensor Fig. 13-33 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 19...
Page 343: Developer Sleeve
Bearing Developer guide developer sleeve shaft (in order of the C- ring, gear, developer guide, and bearing). Gear Idler gear Idler gear shaft Fig. 13-36 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 20...
Page 344 (Alvania No.2) all around the inside diameter. Wipe off the grease which has Fig. 13-38 run off to the inner side of the oil seal. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 21...
Page 345: Mixer
Gear Remove 1 clip and take off the gear. Spring Release the 1 latch and take off the gear. Bushing Clip Clip Gear Fig. 13-41 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 22...
Page 346 Bushing (with bearing) Front bushing holder Bushing Clip Fig. 13-42 Take off the mixer from the hole of front side. Mixer Fig. 13-43 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 23...
Page 347: Waste Toner Transport Motor (M31)
Fig. 13-45 Remove 2 screws, and take off the belt. Then take off the waste toner transport motor. Belt Waste toner transport motor Fig. 13-46 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 24...
Page 348: Temperature / Humidity Sensor (S12)
 P.13-27 "13.5.12 Waste toner paddle motor (M6)" Release 2 latches, and take off the gear, coupling and spring. Spring Coupling Gear Fig. 13-49 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 25...
Page 349 Disconnect 1 connector. Release 3 latches, and take off the waste toner paddle motor Waste toner paddle motor lock detection sensor lock detection sensor. Fig. 13-50 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 26...
Page 350: Waste Toner Paddle Motor (M6)
Waste toner paddle motor drive unit Fig. 13-52 Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Then take off the waste toner paddle motor. Waste toner paddle motor Fig. 13-53 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 27...
Page 351: Waste Toner Transport Unit
Take off the waste toner transport unit.  P.13-28 "13.5.13 Waste toner transport unit" Release 1 latch, and take off the actuator. Actuator Fig. 13-56 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 28...
Page 352: Developer Unit Motor (M9)
 P.21-5 "21.1.8 Switching regulator"  P.12-23 "12.6.13 Drum drive unit" Remove 1 screw on the right side of the developer drive unit. Fig. 13-59 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 29...
Page 353 Disconnect the 1 connector on the developer unit motor. Remove 2 screws and take off the developer Connector drive unit. Developer drive unit Fig. 13-60 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 30...
Page 354: Toner Motor Assembly
Be careful not to scatter the toner inside the toner supply section. Fig. 13-62 Remove 1 clamp, and then disconnect 1 relay connector. Clamp Connector Fig. 13-63 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 31...
Page 355: Toner Motor (M2, M3, M4, M5)
Gear Release the 2 latches and take off the gear. Fig. 13-65 Remove 2 screws and take off the toner motor. Toner motor Fig. 13-66 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 32...
Page 356: Toner Cartridge Detection Sensor (S8, S9, S10, S11)
Toner cartridge detection sensor. Connector Fig. 13-67 13.5.21 Ozone filter-1 Remove 1 screw, and then take off the ozone filter-1. Ozone filter-1 Fig. 13-68 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 33...
Page 357: Epu Cooling Fan (M33)
 P.13-34 "13.5.22 EPU cooling fan (M33)" Remove 1 screw. Disconnect the 1 relay Relay connector connector, and then take off the ozone exhaust duct. Ozone exhaust duct Fig. 13-71 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 34...
Page 358: Ozone Exhaust Fan (M24)
Internal cooling duct Fig. 13-73 Release the 7 latches and take off the Latch internal cooling fan. Internal cooling fan Fig. 13-74 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 35...
Page 359: Ozone Filter-2
When installing the ozone filter-2, be sure to insert it all the way in and be careful not to damage the mesh. Ozone filter-2 Fig. 13-76 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 36...
Page 360: Adjustment Of The Developer Unit
13.6 Adjustment of the developer unit 13.6.1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor.  P.8-10 "8.5.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 37...
Page 361: Adjustment Of The Doctor-To-Sleeve Gap
“0.65” of the doctor sleeve jig Doctor blade between the developer sleeve and doctor blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the screws. Fig. 13-78 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 38...
Page 362 In addition, confirm that the gauge “0.70” cannot be inserted into the gap. Fig. 13-81 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C DEVELOPER UNIT 13 - 39...
Page 364: Transfer Unit
Transfer belt Image quality sensor Image position aligning 2nd transfer roller Transfer belt cleaning blade sensor ( front / rear ) position detection sensor Fig. 14-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 1...
Page 365: Composition
Paper clinging detection sensor Image position aligning sensor S16 / S17 (front / rear) Image quality sensor S18 (Chapter 15) Registration motor M19 (Chapter 11) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 2...
Page 366: Functions
This sensor installed in the transfer belt unit detects the timing to apply brake on the 1st transfer roller cam motor, and also detects if the 1st transfer rollers are at their contacting or releasing position. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT...
Page 367 This sensor forestalls such case and helps to remove it as a normal paper jam. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 4...
Page 368: General Description Of Operation
7. When the toner image has been transferred onto the paper in the 2nd transfer process, the residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the transfer belt cleaning blade. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 369: Printing In The Black Mode
7. When the toner image has been transferred onto the paper in the 2nd transfer process, the residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the transfer belt cleaning blade. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 6...
Page 370: Color Registration Control
1). * After the test patterns are printed, if the specified number of data is unable to be read successfully, an error (CA00) is generated. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT...
Page 371 • Deviation caused by meandering of the transfer belt Fluctuating deviation in the primary-scanning direction caused by meandering of the transfer belt e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 8...
Page 372: Electric Circuit Description
TBMEN Enable signal TBMDIR Rotation direction signal STMRST Reset signal Normal operation Reset * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 9...
Page 373: St Transfer Roller Cam Motor Control Circuit
TBLTM1B-1C TBLTM1B-1A Fig. 14-4 Control signal Signal ASIC output Motor driver output Motor status TBLTM1A-0C TBLTM1B-1C TBLTM1A-0A TBLTM1B-1A OFF (high impedance) Stop Rotation Unused Brake e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 10...
Page 374: Disassembly And Replacement
Rotate the lever (sky blue) counterclockwise and pull it to the front to take it off. Lever ( sky blue ) Transfer belt cleaning unit Fig. 14-7 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 11...
Page 375 Fig. 14-9 6. Be sure to turn the TBU lifting lever counterclockwise for 90 degrees before installing the process unit (EPU(Y)). TBU lifting lever Fig. 14-10 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 12...
Page 376: Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade / Blade Seal
Transfer belt cleaning blade Fig. 14-12 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 13...
Page 377: Transfer Belt Unit (Tbu)
Disconnect the 1 connector. Connector Fig. 14-14 Hold the holder, and then pull out the transfer Transfer belt unit belt unit toward you. Holder Holder Fig. 14-15 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 14...
Page 378 Fig. 14-18 stop. 6. When the unit has been securely inserted, close the middle guide. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 15...
Page 379: Transfer Belt
Spring TBU cleanner pressure hook assembly Fig. 14-20 Remove 1 screw, and then take off the front bracket and handle. Front bracket Handle Fig. 14-21 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 16...
Page 380 6. Check if the rib on both ends of the Fig. 14-24 transfer belt does not run on the rollers. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 17...
Page 381: Drive Roller
Remove 1 screw, 2 gears, 2 pins and 1 bearing on the rear side of the drive roller. Bearing Gear Drive roller Gear Fig. 14-27 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 18...
Page 382: St Transfer Roller
6 lift levers Fig. 14-28 Remove 4 screws. 1st transfer roller Then remove 4 of the 1st transfer rollers and 4 front terminals. Front terminal Fig. 14-29 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 19...
Page 383: Nd Transfer Facing Roller / 2Nd Transfer Facing Roller Cleaning Mylar
Mylar Fig. 14-31 Note: Never attempt to loosen the 2 red screws shown in the figure. Fig. 14-32 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 20...
Page 384: Tension Roller
Remove the E-rings and springs of both front Tension roller arm Tension roller arm and rear tension roller arms. Then take off the tension roller arms. Spring Spring Fig. 14-34 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 21...
Page 385: St Transfer Roller Cam Motor (M8)
Bushing Bushing Fig. 14-36 Remove 2 screws, and then take off the TBU brush bracket. TBU brush bracket Fig. 14-37 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 22...
Page 386 Gear Gear Gear Fig. 14-39 Remove 2 screws, and then take off the 1st transfer roller cam motor. 1st transfer roller cam motor Fig. 14-40 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 23...
Page 387 Release the latch and disconnect the connector to take off the 1st transfer roller status detection sensor. Seal Connector 1st transfer roller status detection sensor Fig. 14-42 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 24...
Page 388: Nd Transfer Unit (Tru)
Connector Clamp Fig. 14-44 Remove 1 screw, and then take off the 2nd transfer unit hinge stay. 2nd transfer unit hinge stay Fig. 14-45 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 25...
Page 389: Nd Transfer Roller
Remove 4 screws and take off the TRU cover. Note: When installing the TRU cover, be sure not to damage the mylar. Mylar TRU cover Fig. 14-48 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 26...
Page 390: Paper Clinging Detection Sensor (S27)
Disconnect the connector, release the latch 2nd transfer roller and take off the 2nd transfer roller position position detection detection sensor. sensor Connector Fig. 14-51 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 27...
Page 391: Transfer Belt Motor (M7)
3 screws. Transfer belt motor unit Fig. 14-53 Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt motor. Transfer belt motor Fig. 14-54 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 28...
Page 392: Transfer Cover Switch (Sw3)
 P.3-32 "3.5.16 Right inner cover" Release the 2 latches, and then disconnect Latch the connector to take off the transfer cover switch. Latch Connector Fig. 14-55 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 29...
Page 394 * When the difference between “05-4732-0: Reference value” and “05-4732-1: actual value” is 10 bits, the equipment has already performed automatic correction by approx. 1 mm. (10) Key in [408] and press the [START] button. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT...
Page 395 [ENTER] button. Key in the recorded adjustment value. 100% Check the adjustment value. TEST MODE Check the adjustment value Fig. 14-56 (12) Turn the power OFF. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved TRANSFER UNIT 14 - 32...
Page 396: Adjustment Of Gap Between Transfer Belt Unit (Tbu) Drive Gears
Take off 1 ozone filter, 2 rear covers and the ozone exhausting duct. Loosen 3 screws shown in the figure. (Tension is applied by the spring.) Tighten the 3 screws loosened in step 2. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C TRANSFER UNIT...
Page 398: Image Quality Control
Image quality control unit Image position aligning sensor ( rear ) Sensor shutter solenoid Image quality sensor Image position aligning sensor ( front ) Fig. 15-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 1...
Page 399: Composition
Image forming process Transfer belt Image quality sensor Laser optical system Light source Reflected light Various image forming amount signal amount signal conditions ASIC Fig. 15-2 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 2...
Page 400: Principle Of The Sensor
Light emitting Light receiving element element Reflected light amount signal Reflected light amount voltage ASIC Light source amount voltage Light source amount signal Fig. 15-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 3...
Page 401: Flow Chart Of Control Procedure
The image forming conditions are determined and stored in SRAM. [ 10 ] Control procedure is completed. ( The determined image forming conditions will be reflected on subsequent prints. ) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL...
Page 402: Disassembly And Replacement
 P.15-5 "15.5.1 Image quality control unit" Remove 2 screws and take off the image position aligning sensor (rear). Image position aligning sensor ( rear ) Fig. 15-6 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 5...
Page 403: Image Quality Sensor (S18)
Take off the image quality control unit  P.15-5 "15.5.1 Image quality control unit" Remove 2 screws and take off the sensor shutter solenoid. Sensor shutter solenoid Fig. 15-8 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 6...
Page 404: Adjustment Of The Image Quality Control
Performing Image Quality Control When the image quality sensor is replaced, perform the automatic initialization of the image quality control.  P.8-12 "8.5.3 Performing Image Quality Control" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 7...
Page 406: Fuser Unit / Paper Exit Section
Center heater lamp Side heater lamp Sub heater lamp Fuser belt Fuser roller Fuser belt center thermopile Fuser belt rear thermopile Fig. 16-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 1...
Page 407: Composition
Pressure roller rear thermistor THM5 Pressure roller thermostat THMO3 Separation finger PM parts Separation plate Fuser motor Exit sensor Exit roller Exit motor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 2...
Page 408: Functions
ON the power supply to the heater lamps, and when it is higher than the preset temperature, it cuts off the supply. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION...
Page 409 This motor drives the exit roller. It rotates reversely to switch back paper when the equipment is in the reverse operation. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 4...
Page 410: Description Of Operation
(LAMP3). When OHP film or thick paper is being transported, the transport speed is halved in order to improve fusing efficiency. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 5...
Page 411: Electric Circuit Description
Pressure roller lamp control signal Overheat detection signal AC line DC line Reset signal Forcible power-off circuit Fig. 16-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 6...
Page 412 ON, the equipment is in ready or printing status, each heater lamp is turned ON/OFF alternately to maintain the surface temperature of the fuser belt at a certain level (setting temperature of each status). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION...
Page 413 Warming-up Fixed time (08-205) Mode Auto °C Shut Off Mode Fixed time (08-206) Temperature of fuser belt Heater lamp Fig. 16-4 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 8...
Page 414 OFF again. After confirming that it is the fuser unit abnormality, correct the abnormality and reset the counter value (08-400) to “0” to start up the equipment normally. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION...
Page 415 BHSTH rear thermopile IC64 IC48 ASIC converter +5VB Pressure roller center thermistor PHCTH +5VB Pressure roller rear thermistor PHETH Fig. 16-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 10...
Page 416 (C450) (48) section is 50°C higher or more than that of the fuser unit center section for more than 2 seconds. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 11...
Page 417 Ready temperat ure or below Ready C466 Fixed time temperat (C465) ure or below Ready temperat ure or below e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 12...
Page 418 200°C or above 40°C C447 or below 40°C or below 40°C or below 40°C C467 or below 40°C or below © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 13...
Page 419 * The figures in the “Error code” and “Counter” fields with parentheses denote that an error status has not yet been determined (= error status is detected only once). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 14...
Page 420: Fuser Motor Control Circuit
* When thick paper or OHP sheet is used, FSMGA signal moves to a low level to reduce the motor speed in half and lower the paper transport speed so that the fusibility of toner is improved. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 421: Exit Motor Control Circuit
Rotation direction signal STMRST Reset signal Normal operation Reset * CW: Clockwise rotation, CCW: Counter clockwise rotation viewing from the axis e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 16...
Page 422: Disassembly And Replacement
2. Fix the 2 screws securely. 3. Check that they are engaged properly by turning the handle. Handle Fig. 16-9 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 17...
Page 423: Front Side Cover
Remove 2 screws (one on the rear side is a shoulder screw) and take off the heat roller roller cover. Shoulder screw Heat roller cover Fig. 16-12 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 18...
Page 424: Pressure Roller Cover
P.16-18 "16.6.3 Rear side cover" Release the harness out of the clamp, and then disconnect 1 relay connector. Relay connector Fig. 16-15 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 19...
Page 425: Separation Finger Unit / Separation Finger
Fig. 16-17 Remove 2 screws, and then take off the separation finger cover. Separation finger cover Fig. 16-18 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 20...
Page 426 Release the harness on the rear side out of 2 clamps and the harness guide, and then Clamp disconnect 1 relay connector. Relay connector Fig. 16-21 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 21...
Page 427 Then take Pressure roller lamp Pressure roller off the pressure roller by lifting it up. Bracket Fig. 16-24 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 22...
Page 428: Separation Plate / Fuser Belt Unit / Heater Lamp (Center / Side / Sub)
Release the harness on the rear side out of 2 clamps and the harness guide, and then disconnect 1 relay connector. Relay connector Fig. 16-27 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 23...
Page 429 If the gap is out of the specified value, be sure to adjust it.  P.16-45 "16.7 Adjustment of the Separation Plate Gap" Fig. 16-30 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 24...
Page 430 4 relay Clamp connectors. Clamp Relay connector Fig. 16-31 Note: In e-STUDIO4520C, disconnect 5 relay Clamp connectors. Clamp Relay connector Fig. 16-32 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 25...
Page 431 Remove 2 screws, and then release the harness out of 4 clamps. Clamp Harness Fig. 16-33 Note: In e-STUDIO4520C, remove 3 screws. Clamp Harness Fig. 16-34 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 26...
Page 432 Lamp front bracket Fig. 16-35 Note: In e-STUDIO4520C, the shape of the bracket is different. Clamp Lamp front bracket Fig. 16-36 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 27...
Page 433 Fuser belt roller. front thermistor bracket • The fuser belt front thermistor bracket moves smoothly. Fig. 16-39 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 28...
Page 434 1 clamp to take off the fuser belt sensor bracket and the lamp rear bracket. Clamp Fuser belt sensor bracket Lamp rear bracket Fig. 16-42 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 29...
Page 435: Fuser Roller
/ Heater lamp (center / side / sub)" Bearing Remove 2 bearings from each side of the heat roller. Heat roller Bearing Fig. 16-45 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 30...
Page 436: Pressure Roller / Pressure Roller Lamp (Lamp3)
Remove 1 screw and release the harness out of 7 clamps. Then take off the pressure roller thermostat bracket. Clamp Clamp Clamp Fig. 16-48 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 31...
Page 437 1.6 - 2.4 mm through the opening. Pressure roller 1.6~2.4 mm Pressure roller thermostat ( THMO3 ) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 32...
Page 438: Pressure Roller Center Thermistor (Thm4 Pressure Roller Rear Thermistor (Thm5)
1 clamp to take off the pressure roller center thermistor. Pressure roller center thermistor Clamp Fig. 16-53 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 33...
Page 439: Fuser Belt Center Thermostat (Thmo1)
 P.16-19 "16.6.6 Transport guide" Release the harness out of 1 terminals of the fuser belt center thermostat. Harness Fuser belt center thermostat Fig. 16-56 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 34...
Page 440 When installing, be careful not to insert the tab terminal between the insulating tube and the terminal. Insulating tube Terminal Harness Tab terminal Fig. 16-59 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 35...
Page 441: Fuser Belt Rear Thermostat (Thmo2)
- 2.2 mm while they are being pushed rear thermostat ( THMO2 ) each other, through the opening. Fuser belt 1.6~2.2 mm Fig. 16-62 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 36...
Page 442: Fuser Belt Front Thermistor (Thm3)
Remove 1 screw and take off the harness cover. Clamp Release the harness out of 10 clamps. Clamp Harness cover Clamp Fig. 16-65 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 37...
Page 443: Exit Sensor (S26)
16.6.16 Exit sensor (S26) Take off the fuser unit.  P.16-17 "16.6.1 Fuser unit" Open the jam access cover. Fig. 16-68 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 38...
Page 444: Exit Unit
Exit duct base Fig. 16-73 Remove 2 screws and take off the 2 leaf springs. Leaf spring Exit frame Fig. 16-74 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 40...
Page 445: Upper Exit Roller / Lower Exit Roller
 P.16-17 "16.6.1 Fuser unit" Loosen 2 screws and take off the Fuser belt thermopile cover. Fuser belt thermopile cover Fig. 16-77 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 41...
Page 446  P.21-10 "21.1.11 Board case" Disconnect the connector. Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser Fuser motor motor. Connector Fig. 16-80 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 42...
Page 447: Fuser Motor (M17)
Remove 1 screw and take off the cover. Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser/exit section cooling fan. Fuser/exit section cooling fan Fig. 16-83 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 43...
Page 448 Replace the exit motor with the bracket installed. • Never attempt to loosen 2 screws fixing Belt exit motor. Pully Exit motor Fig. 16-84 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 44...
Page 449: Adjustment Of The Separation Plate Gap
1.0 mm jig cannot. Insert the jig into the last window on the separation plate viewed from the front, and then adjust it in the same manner. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION...
Page 450 0.6 mm to 0.8 mm in order to prevent paper jamming. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 46...
Page 451: Automatic Duplexing Unit (Adu)
Entrance guide ADU motor ADU entrance sensor Paper guide ADU clutch Middle transport roller ADU exit sensor Exit guide Lower transport roller Fig. 17-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 1...
Page 452: Composition
CLT7 ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor ADU opening/closing switch ADU driving PC board Upper transport roller Middle transport roller Lower transport roller e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 2...
Page 453: Functions
This switch detects whether the ADU is open or not. 6. Upper transport roller / Middle transport roller / Lower transport roller This roller transports paper into the ADU. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU)
Page 454: Drive Of Adu
The ADU clutch (CLT7) is then turned ON and the middle transport roller and lower transport roller are rotated. ADU motor Upper transport roller ADU clutch Middle transport roller Lower transport roller Fig. 17-2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 4...
Page 455: Description Of Operations
The operation of the duplex printing differs depending on the size of the paper; single-paper circulation and alternateness circulation. The figures in the following pages show the circulating operations during duplex copying. The numbers in the figures indicate the page numbers. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU)
Page 456 With the paper larger than A4/LT size, duplex printing (back-side printing→ front-side printing) is performed for one sheet at a time as shown below. Fig. 17-3 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 6...
Page 457 Back side of the 1st sheet→ Back side of the 2nd sheet→ Front side of the 1st sheet→ Front side of the 2nd sheet Fig. 17-4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU)
Page 458 Front side of the 3rd sheet (5) → Back side of the 5th sheet (10) → Front side of the 4th sheet (7) → Front side of the 5th sheet (9) Fig. 17-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 8...
Page 459 Timing chart for duplex copying from 1st drawer (A4, 3 sheets) Fig. 17-6 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 9...
Page 460 Timing chart for duplex copying from 1st drawer (A3, 1 sheet) Fig. 17-7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 10...
Page 461: Flow Chart
ADU motor stopped ADU motor ON ADU clutch ON ADU exit sensor check the arrival? ADU transport jam (E520) Specified time has passed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 11...
Page 462 ON? ADU misfeeding (E110) Registration proceeded Registration operation completed ADU motor stopped ADU clutch OFF Next paper is ready for the registration e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 12...
Page 463: Disassembly And Replacement
Connector  P.3-31 "3.5.12 Right rear hinge cover" Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw fixing the ground wires. Ground wire Fig. 17-10 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 13...
Page 464: Adu Inside Rear Cover
ADU inside rear cover Open the automatic duplexing unit. ADU inside rear cover Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU inside rear cover. Fig. 17-13 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 14...
Page 465: Adu Opening/Closing Switch (Sw7)
Take off the ADU opening/closing switch.  P.17-15 "17.7.4 ADU opening/closing ADU cover switch (SW7)" Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU cover. Fig. 17-16 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 15...
Page 466: Paper Guide
ADU drive unit / ADU motor (M22) Take off the ADU clutch.  P.17-16 "17.7.8 ADU clutch (CLT7)" Remove the spring. Spring Fig. 17-19 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 16...
Page 467 Take off the 1 E-ring. Then take off the 3 gears and timing belt from the ADU drive unit. Gear Gear Timing belt Gear E-ring Fig. 17-23 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 17...
Page 468: Upper Transport Roller
Remove 1 clip on the front side. Upper transport roller Remove 2 bushings and take off the upper Clip transport roller. Bushing Bushing Fig. 17-25 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 18...
Page 469: Middle Transport Roller
Middle transport roller E-ring Take off 1 bushing on the front side. Then take off the middle transport roller. Clip Bushing Bushing Fig. 17-27 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 19...
Page 470: Lower Transport Roller
ADU entrance sensor  P.17-15 "17.7.6 ADU cover" Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latches and take off the ADU entrance sensor. Fig. 17-30 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 20...
Page 471: Adu Exit Sensor (S39)
17.7.16 ADU upper cover assembly Open the automatic duplexing unit. ADU upper cover assembly Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU upper cover assembly. Fig. 17-33 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 21...
Page 472: Cover Interlock Switch (Sw2)
Switch guide Shaft Fig. 17-35 Release the latch, and then take off the Cover interlock switch. Cover interlock switch Fig. 17-36 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) 17 - 22...
Page 473: Power Supply Unit
TRC (Triac) is driven by the heater control signal (BHCON, BHSON, PHON, SUBON) from the LGC board and then AC power is supplied to each heater lamp (center heater lamp, side heater lamp, pressure roller lamp) in the fuser unit. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C POWER SUPPLY UNIT...
Page 474: Operation Of Dc Output Circuits
Only DC voltage and 5 VS are output from the power supply unit. The [POWER] button is monitored and the LED of the main power switch is lit. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 2...
Page 475: Output Channel
Output to the Finisher +24 VD4: CN407 Pins 9, 10, 11 and 12 Output to the Finisher Output voltage by the type of connector © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 3...
Page 476 +5.1 VD, +24 VD1, +24 VD2, +24 VD3 board, high-voltage transformer (via LGC board) CN406 For the finisher +24 VD4 CN407 For the SLG board, RADF +24 VD e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 4...
Page 477: Fuse
Key copy counter, copy key card, coin controller +24 VD4 SLG board Scan motor F204: 6.3 A (Semi time-lag) Lamp inverter board RADF Finisher © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 5...
Page 478: Configuration Of Power Supply Unit
18.6 Configuration of Power Supply Unit CN402 ~ CN407 Noise filter Noise filter CN401 CN409 CN408 Fig. 18-1 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 6...
Page 479: Sequence Of Power Supply
PWR-EN ( 5VS ) 20ms or lower 5VB/12VB ( MAIN ) 700ms or lower RLY-ON ( 5VB ) 24VD/5VD ( DOOR ) Fig. 18-2 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 7...
Page 480 20ms or lower 5VB/12VB ( MAIN ) 100ms or lower RLY-ON ( 5VB ) 700ms or lower 700ms or lower 24VD/5VD ( DOOR ) Fig. 18-3 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 8...
Page 481: Ac Wire Harness
J703 White White AC (N) J706 J705 Black Black AC (L) Black White AC (N) +5.1VB Yellow Black Black AC (L) Breaker Fig. 18-4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 9...
Page 482 J703 White White AC (N) J706 J705 Black Black AC (L) Black White AC (N) +5.1VB Yellow Black Black AC (L) Breaker Fig. 18-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved POWER SUPPLY UNIT 18 - 10...
Page 483: Preventive Maintenance (Pm)
Counter indicating the current number of prints and driving time 08-252 : Current value of PM counter [process unit (K)] 08-376 : Current value of PM time counter [process unit (K)] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 1...
Page 484: Pm Display Contents
The counter indicating “current number of prints and driving time” used for the PM display function is reset by entering “0” in it or clearing it in the PM support mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 2...
Page 485 When the current value of “2nd TRANSFER” on the main screen or “2nd TRANSFER ROLLER” on the sub screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 486: General Descriptions For Pm Procedure
Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 4...
Page 487: Pm Support Mode
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL] button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after moving from the sub screen. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 488: Operational Screen
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 6...
Page 489 Displaying of the number of print / develop pages and drive counts and previous replacement date for a chosen sub unit 3. Clear screen © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 7...
Page 490 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of print / develop pages” and Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 8...
Page 491: Access Tree
SEP ROLLER (1st CST.) [Separation roller] 2nd CST. PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.) [2nd drawer] FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.) SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.) [Separation roller] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 9...
Page 492 PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1393) • Bypass unit Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1394) • Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1395) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 10...
Page 493: Work Flow Of Parts Replacement
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode. Replace the part. Does it exceed the specified drive count? Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”. Fig. 19-7 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 11...
Page 494: Preventive Maintenance Checklist
If the values are different, the one for the full color mode is indicated in parentheses ( ). If they differ according to the model, they are indicated in the order of the e-STUDIO2330C, e-STUDIO2820C, e-STUDIO2830C and e- STUDIO3520C/3530C/4520C.
Page 495: Scanner
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 496: Laser Unit
Operati Parts ation/ Items to check Cleaning list (x 1,000 drive Coatin (x 1,000 sheets) check counts) Pickup roller 20-20 Feed roller 20-24 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 14...
Page 497 Open the 2nd transfer unit, and then open the middle guide by holding its knob to clean the entire surface of the Mylar with alcohol. Note: Do not hold the middle guide itself when opening and closing it. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 15...
Page 498: Automatic Duplexing Unit
One side of the GCB bushing to which the shaft is inserted One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted Paper guide 47-4 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 16...
Page 499: Bypass Feed Unit
(4 places). Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 500: Main Charger
* F1: Main charger case Clean the main charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 18...
Page 501: Drum/Cleaner Unit, Cleaner Related Section
Since “patting powder” may affect the initial image if it adheres to the OPC surface, do not apply it. The friction between the drum and cleaning blade is sufficiently small without it and no problem would occur even if it is not applied. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 502 Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages which have been made e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 20...
Page 503 If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of output pages. Note: Never use water or alcohol for cleaning the transfer belt recovery blade. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 21...
Page 504: Developer Unit (K, Y, M, And C)
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and then image quality control initialization.  P.8-10 "8.5.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor"  P.8-12 "8.5.3 Performing Image Quality Control" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 22...
Page 505 Fig. 19-21 * H7: Auto-toner sensor Clean the surface of the auto-toner sensor with a cotton swab or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 23...
Page 506: Waste Toner Box
Parts ation/ Items to check Cleaning list (x 1,000 drive Coatin (x 1,000 sheets) check counts) Waste toner box full 42-104 detection sensor e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 24...
Page 507: Transfer Belt Unit / Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit
Take care not to have the transfer belt surface being damaged or dented. Replace the transfer belt with a new one regardless of the number of output pages, if any crack or major scar is found. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 508 Do not place the blade near a heat source. • Cleaning procedure Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 26...
Page 509: Image Quality Control Unit
Clean the image quality sensor, image position aligning sensor (Front/Rear) and the sensor shutter when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade and the blade seal, or the transfer belt itself. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
Page 510: Nd Transfer Roller Unit
If toner adheres to the ribs of the 2nd transfer roller paper guide, clean it with a soft pad, cloth or electric vacuum cleaner. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 28...
Page 511: Fuser Unit
Fuser belt front thermistor 43-21 Fuser belt thermostat 43-19 (center/rear) 43-20 M10 Separation plate 43-2 M11 Entry guide 44-27 44-28 M12 Fuser unit gear 44-30 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 29...
Page 512 Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 30...
Page 513 92,000 sheets e-STUDIO2820C every 112,000 sheets every 112,000 sheets e-STUDIO2830C every 140,000 sheets every 112,000 sheets e-STUDIO3520C e-STUDIO3530C every 140,000 sheets every 140,000 sheets e-STUDIO4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 31...
Page 514: Exit Unit
Wipe off any old grease, and then apply 0.5 to 1 rice-sized grains of white grease (Molykote HP- 300) onto the inside of the roller and both end faces of the shaft hole. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 32...
Page 515: Radf (Mr-3018)
Intermediate transfer roller 3-13 Front read roller 3-14 Rear read roller Reverse registration roller 3-10 Exit/reverse roller 4-25 O10 Platen sheet B or A © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 33...
Page 516: Pfp (Kd-1023)
Coatin (x 1,000 sheets) check counts) Pickup roller 5-20 (upper/lower) Feed roller 5-24 (upper/lower) Separation roller AV, W2 (upper/lower) Drive gear (tooth face) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 34...
Page 517: Lcf (Kd-1024)
(x 1,000 drive Coatin (x 1,000 sheets) check counts) Pickup roller 4-30 Feed roller 4-28 Separation roller 5-12 Drive gear (tooth face) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 35...
Page 518: Storage Of Supplies And Replacement Parts
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 36...
Page 519 Separation roller K-ROLL-SPT ROL-KIT-1010 Pick up roller ROL-PICK-UP Feed roller ROL-PAPER-FED-F Separation roller ROL-PAPER-FED-S DF-KIT-3018 Pick up roller ASYS-ROL-FEED Feed roller ASYS-ROL-FEED Separation roller ASYS-ROL-RET © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 19 - 37...
Page 520: Maintenance Part List
Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 102-5 Harness jig Updating the converter PC board 21-3 Part list represents the page item in “e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/ 4520C Service Parts List”. No.1-13: Refer to “e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C Service Parts List” No.14 : Refer to “MJ-1101 Service Parts List” e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ©...
Page 522: Grease List
100 g Tube 101-23 * : Part list represents the page item in “e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C Service Parts List”. 19.11 Operational Items in Overhauling Overhauling must be performed in order to maintain the quality level of this equipment at the following timing.
Page 523: Firmware Updating
Fax Unit FAX firmware (GD-1250) Imaging Acceleration Board Imaging Acceleration Board firmware USB media (GE-1170) * The harness jig for board connection (HRNS-CNV-DL-JIG) is necessary. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 1...
Page 524 System ROM, Engine ROM, Scanner ROM P. 20-26 Scanner ROM P. 20-32 RADF ROM (MR-3018) P. 20-34 Engine ROM P. 20-28 FAX ROM (GD-1250) P. 20-53 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 2...
Page 525 Finisher ROM (MJ-1101) P. 20-36 Hole punch unit ROM (MJ-6101) P. 20-42 Converter ROM(MJ-1101) P. 20-38 Finisher ROM (MJ-1030) P. 20-46 Finisher ROM (MJ-1031) P. 20-50 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 3...
Page 526 The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When the hard disk is replaced with a new one, check the other firmware version used and then write a corresponding suitable version. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 4...
Page 527: Firmware Updating With Usb Media
(dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C) and the data file for updating in the model specific folder. Model specific folder name 2820C_3530C USB media mentusb2.o 2820C_3530C dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C firmImage0.bin hdd.bin T450MWW.xxx T450SLGWW.xxx T450IWW.xxx Fig. 20-1 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 5...
Page 528 However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the root directory already exists, this will have priority. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 6...
Page 529: Master Data/System Rom/Engine Rom/Scanner Rom
Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover. USB port USB media Fig. 20-1 Note: Updating cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 7...
Page 530 Checking of data file failed. ROMDATA Other models ROMDATA Vxxxx.xxx x Master data of other model (hdd.bin) The version name comes at “xxxx.xxx.x”. are stored. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 8...
Page 531 Scanner Firm Update ..Flash Update Scanner Firm Update ..Completed “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly. Fig. 20-3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 9...
Page 532 (When the download is written) (When the download is written) Reception status code abnormality Reception status code abnormality (When the download is finished) (When the download is finished) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 10...
Page 533 Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons. • Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button. • Press the [INITIALIZE] button. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 11...
Page 534 Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1642) (using [4][FAX] test pattern):  P.8-37 "8.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" • Automatic gamma adjustment < PRT > (05-1008) (using [70][FAX] test pattern):  P.8-52 "8.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 12...
Page 535 Firmware Update Firmware Update Update Completed Fig. 20-4 Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update. System ROM Fig. 20-5 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 13...
Page 539: Imaging Acceleration Board Rom (Ge-1170)
The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx. 3 minutes. On this screen, the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to be updated are displayed. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 540 “*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the item. Item Remarks 5. MEP Firmware Update Updating the Imaging Acceleration Board ROM e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 18...
Page 541 An error occurred during the memory allocation. Other error Other error Press the [ON/OFF] button to shut down the equipment, and then remove the USB media. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 19...
Page 542  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" Note: Check that the icon of the Imaging Acceleration Board on the scan menu is displayed in color. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 20...
Page 543 [C] Display during the update Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update. Imaging Acceleration Board ROM Fig. 20-4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 21...
Page 544: Firmware Updating With Pwa-Dwnld-350-Jig2
Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 22...
Page 545: Writing The Data To The Download Jig (Pwa-Dwnld-350-Jig2)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931) (or equivalent) model 1881 model 1931 ( LV650 ) [ PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 ] [ PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 ] Fig. 20-7 Fig. 20-8 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 23...
Page 546 ROM3 ROM4 ROM5 ROM6 Note: Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM version is different. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 24...
Page 547 Clear Buffer Before Loading the file Clear buffer with blank state [B-1] Engine ROM Engine ROM Rotary Switch File Name Flash ROM T450MWW.xxx ROM1 ROM2 ROM3 ROM4 ROM5 ROM6 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 25...
Page 548: System Rom
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 26...
Page 549 After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 550: Engine Rom
Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment. Unplug the power cable from the outlet. Take off the rear cover-1. Rear cover-1 Fig. 20-11 Remove the cover plate. Cover plate Fig. 20-12 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 28...
Page 551 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 552 Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1642) (using [4][FAX] test pattern):  P.8-37 "8.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" • Automatic gamma adjustment < PRT > (05-1008) (using [70][FAX] test pattern):  P.8-52 "8.7.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 30...
Page 553: Firmware Updating With K-Pwa-Dlm-320
Fax Unit Fax unit firmware FAX board (GD-1250) K-PWA-DLM-320 Connector Mark for ROM installation direction Fig. 20-14 Important: Pay attention to the direction of the ROM. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 31...
Page 554: Scanner Rom
Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Take off the right upper cover. Right upper cover Fig. 20-15 Remove the cover plate. Cover plate Fig. 20-16 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 32...
Page 555 If the exposure lamp blinks twice at the time of start-up and a “C270” error occurs, the model of the scanner ROM updated may be incorrect. Check the model of the scanner ROM and retry updating. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 556: Radf Firmware (Mr-3018)
Fig. 20-19 Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 34...
Page 557 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 558: Finisher Firmware (Mj-1101)
Fig. 20-21 Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons. Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 36...
Page 559 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 560: Converter Firmware (Mj-1101)
Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Take off the finisher board access cover. Board access cover Fig. 20-22 Take off the rear cover-1 of the equipment. Rear cover-1 Fig. 20-23 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 38...
Page 561 Take off the converter PC board from the logic PC board (LGC board). Fig. 20-25 Connect the 10-pin side of the harness jig for board connection to the connector (CN2) of the converter PC board. Fig. 20-26 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 39...
Page 562 Is the harness jig for board connection connected to connector (CN2) of the converter PC board and the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC board correctly? e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 40...
Page 563 Be sure to install the converter PC board in the equipment and connect the finisher (MJ-1101) before confirming the firmware version of the converter firmware.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 564: Hole Punch Unit Firmware (Mj-6101)
Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320). Make sure the direction is correct. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 42...
Page 565 Release the latches and take off the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit. Rear lower cover Fig. 20-31 Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover of the hole punch unit. Rear cover Fig. 20-32 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 43...
Page 566 PC board connected properly? (10) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment and remove the download jig. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 44...
Page 567 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 568: Finisher Firmware/Saddle Stitcher Firmware (Mj-1030)
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover. Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board. Connector Fig. 20-37 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 46...
Page 569 Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record. Fig. 20-38 DIP switch Updating Finisher Firmware Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 47...
Page 570 Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment, remove the download jig, and then return the DIP switch to the status before updating. Install the finisher rear cover. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 48...
Page 571 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING...
Page 572: Finisher Firmware (Mj-1031)
Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Take off the hanging finisher (MJ-1031) from the equipment. Fig. 20-40 Take off the rear cover. Fig. 20-41 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 50...
Page 573 (10) Take off the hanging finisher from the equipment. (11) Install the board access cover. (12) Install the hanging finisher in the equipment. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 51...
Page 574 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 52...
Page 575: Fax Unit Firmware (Gd-1250)
Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Remove the cover plate. Cover plate Fig. 20-44 Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the FAX board. Connector Fig. 20-45 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 53...
Page 576 After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data were overwritten properly.  P.20-55 "20.4 Confirmation of the updated data" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 54...
Page 577: Confirmation Of The Updated Data
Hole punch unit ROM version (MJ-6101 only) 08-9945 Converter board ROM version Updating FAX ROM 08-915 FAX ROM version Imaging Acceleration Board 08-9965 Imaging Acceleration Board SROM version © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 55...
Page 578: When Firmware Updating Fails
If the equipment cannot be started even when the above update has been performed, check that there is no damage to the “SYS board”, “LGC board” or “SLG board”. Replace them if necessary. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 56...
Page 579: Flow Chart For Correcting Usb Update Failure
Check ROM version. Failed twice or more? " 20.4 Confirmation of the updated data " Replace SYS board. Is ROM version correct? Update USB. Update completed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 57...
Page 580 Update USB. Check HDD/ROM version. " 20.4 Confirmation of the updated data " Update succeeded? Is HDD/ROM version correct? Replace SYS board. Update USB. Update completed e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 58...
Page 581 Check ROM version. Failed twice or more? " 20.4 Confirmation of the updated data " Replace target board. Is ROM version correct? Update USB. Update completed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C FIRMWARE UPDATING 20 - 59...
Page 583: Replacement Of Pc Boards/Hdd
Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the HDD case. HDD Case Fig. 21-1 Remove 6 screws, release 1 clamp and take off the bracket. Clamp bracket Fig. 21-2 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 1...
Page 584: Board Cover
 P.3-33 "3.5.19 Rear cover-2" Remove 1 screw and loosen 11 screws. Fig. 21-4 Slide the board cover to take it off. Board cover Fig. 21-5 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 2...
Page 585: Fax Cover
 P.21-3 "21.1.3 FAX cover" Take off the hard disk.  P.21-1 "21.1.1 Hard disk (HDD)" Remove 2 screws and take off 2 earth plates. Fig. 21-8 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 3...
Page 586: Img Board
 P.21-3 "21.1.5 SYS board" IMG board Disconnect 2 connectors. Remove 6 screws and slide the IMG board to take it off. Fig. 21-11 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 4...
Page 587: Lgc Board
Disconnect 3 connectors. Connector cover Fig. 21-13 Disconnect 7 connectors. Remove 2 screws. Slightly lift up the switching regulator and release the hook. Fig. 21-14 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 5...
Page 588 Tilt the switching regulator to the front side and take it off. Switching regulator Fig. 21-15 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 6...
Page 589: High-Voltage Transformer (Hvt)
 P.21-5 "21.1.8 Switching regulator" Disconnect 22 connectors. Fig. 21-16 Remove 7 screws. Release 2 locking supports and take off the high-voltage transformer. High-voltage transformer Fig. 21-17 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 7...
Page 590: Fil Board
1024) from the filter bracket if it is connected. Optional Connector Fig. 21-18 Disconnect 2 relay connector of the filter bracket. Fig. 21-19 Release 2 clamps. Fig. 21-20 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 8...
Page 591 Be sure to use the correct harness (black or white) when assembling. Remove 2 screws, release 2 locking supports and take off the FIL board. Black Locking support Fig. 21-23 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 9...
Page 592: Board Case
Disconnect the 1 connector from the IMG IMG Board board. SYS Board Fig. 21-25 Disconnect 2 connectors from the LGC board. LGC board Fig. 21-26 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 10...
Page 593 Release harnesses from 4 clamps. Fig. 21-27 Open the board case. Note: Board case Open the board case gently during maintenance work or similar. Fig. 21-28 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 11...
Page 594: Sram Board
SYS board. Be sure to assemble the correct SRAM board. SRAM board SRAM board (for LGC board) (for SYS board) Fig. 21-31 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 12...
Page 595: Sram Board
Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM board for SYS board from the case. Latch SRAM board (for SYS board) Case Fig. 21-34 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 13...
Page 596 LGC board. Be sure to assemble the correct SRAM board. SRAM board SRAM board (for SYS board) (for LGC board) Fig. 21-35 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 14...
Page 597: Precautions, Procedures And Settings For Replacing Pc Boards And Hdd
When SRAM requires replacement, see “21.2.6Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS board)” / “21.2.7Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for LGC board)“. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD...
Page 598: Hdd Fault Diagnosis
High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness HDD replacement displayed as “-------”. or SYS board may be one of the causes.) is recommended. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 16...
Page 599 This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode. Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 17...
Page 600: Precautions And Procedures When Replacing The Hdd
[E] Replace/Format HDD [F] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information [G] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE" [H] Reset "FUNCTION" list Setting completed Fig. 21-37 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 18...
Page 601 Press the [LIST] button. Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” is printed out. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD...
Page 602 (11) Check the version of the HDD (08-944). Confirm the version displayed on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] button. (12) Turn the power OFF. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 20...
Page 603 Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item. Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 21...
Page 604: Precautions And Procedures When Replacing The Sys Board
If the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) has been installed, a service call “F200” occurs. In this case, key in “0” at “Releasing F200 service call” (08-633) and then reinstall the Data Overwrite Enabler. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 22...
Page 605: Procedures And Settings When Replacing The Slg Board
Replace the SLG board.  P.7-28 "7.6.12 SLG board (SLG)" Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board -> SLG board (05-363)”. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 23...
Page 606 Take off the Fax Unit (GD-1250) if it is installed. Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).  P.21-13 "21.1.13 SRAM board " e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 24...
Page 607 Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, and then press the [OK] button. Turn the power off. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD...
Page 608 Set the dial type according to these buttons: [USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [FAX] -> [INITIAL SETUP] [H] Set date and time [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [GENERAL] → [CLOCK] → [DATE/TIME] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 26...
Page 609 When any of the options below was installed, reinstall a license for the corresponding option following its unpacking instructions. • Meta Scan Enabler (GS-1010) • External Interface Enabler (GS-1020) • Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) • IPSec Enabler (GP-1080) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 27...
Page 610: Procedures And Settings When Replacing Sram Board (For Lgc Board)
05/2985 05/2986 05/2987 05/2988 05/2984 05/2983 Start up with the Adjustment mode (05). Enter the all adjustment values written down in step (1). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 28...
Page 611 Since “1: For line” is set for “Line adjustment mode” in SRAM supplied as a service part, number of prints is not counted unless it is changed. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD...
Page 612: Firmware Confirmation After The Pc Board/Hdd Replacement
Hole punch unit ROM version 08-9945 Converter ROM version Updating FAX ROM 08-915 FAX ROM version Imaging Acceleration Board 08-9965 Imaging Acceleration Board SROM version e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 30...
Page 613: Precautions For Installation Of Gp-1070 And Disposal Of Hdd/Board
When disposing of the SRAM board, perform 08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing) for security reasons. Note: If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD 21 - 31...
Page 615: Backup Function
Data files that are available for backup are limited to user data, setting data and SRAM data.The detailed descriptions for each file are shown below. Note that backup files are encrypted. 1.User data file © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION...
Page 616 Date: MON MAR 17 18:34:40 2008 Fig. 22-1 • File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common) Line 1: Version Line 2: Serial number Line 3: Date e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 2...
Page 617: Cloning Procedure
The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled.In this case, ask the user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C...
Page 618 5: FAX Kit Backing up Option: Fax setting 6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting * No items are selected in the screen by default. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 4...
Page 619 “Back Up Completed” is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed. Turn the power OFF and remove the USB media. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 5...
Page 620 The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled.In this case, ask the user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 6...
Page 621 * No items are selected in the screen by default. * Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were backed up. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION...
Page 622 Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] Enter the password  [COUNTER] [DEPARTMANT SETTING] Enter the password[RESET ALL COUNTERS] * Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] buttons is set to be disabled. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 8...
Page 623 ERROR 7 Checksum error ERROR 8 Model check error ERROR 9 Version check error ERROR 10 Destination check error ERROR 11 Serial number check error © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 9...
Page 624: Aes Data Encryption Function Setting
Since the energy saver mode cannot be set using the control panel, set it in TopAccess. However, the setting of “Sleep/Auto Shut Off” cannot be changed in TopAccess and “Disable” is displayed. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 10...
Page 625: Setting Procedure
[F] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information [G] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE" [H] Reset "FUNCTION" list [I] Check actuation of data encryption function setting Setting completed Fig. 22-13 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 11...
Page 626 Press the [LIST] button. Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” is printed out. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 12...
Page 627 2. Key in [100] and then press the [START] button. 3. Key in [102] and then press the [START] button. 4. Turn the power OFF. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 13...
Page 628 * When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security with a certificate is used) Also, upload the following certificate file with ”Install Certificate for Wireless LAN” of TopAccess. CA certificate User certificate e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 14...
Page 629 Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item. Note: Explain to the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/her password. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 15...
Page 630: Procedure For Disabling Data Encryption Function
Set the data encryption function disabled following the procedure shown in  P.22-16 "22.2.4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function". Then perform the code 08-1426 (Forcible HDD data clearing) to completely erase the data in the HDD. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 16...
Page 631: Assist Mode
2. Do not perform this function in cases other than the installation of a new SRAM because all data in the SRAM will be deleted with this function. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C BACKUP FUNCTION...
Page 632: Operating Procedure Of Assist Mode
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button. Note: Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/ her password. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 22 - 18...
Page 633: Self-Diagnostic Mode
Setting mode (08): Refer to  P.25-1 "25. SETTING MODE (08)" • • List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 1...
Page 634 In the USB storage procedure above, lists are stored in a CSV format. The names of the CSV files are shown below (the numbers represent the serial number of the machine: “0123456789”.) 201:ADJUSTMENT_LIST_0123456789.csv 202:SETTING_LIST_0123456789.csv 203:PM_LIST_0123456789.csv 204:PIXEL_TONER_LIST_0123456789.csv 205:PIXEL_SERVICE_LIST_0123456789.csv 206:ERROR_LOG_0123456789.csv 208:FW_UPGRADE_LOG0123456789.csv 210:POWER_ONOFF_LOG_0123456789.csv e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 2...
Page 635 State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes Fig. 23-1 *1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 3...
Page 636: Input Check (Test Mode 03)
Fig. 23-2 Example of display during input check Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 4...
Page 637 Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (Entrance Paper present No paper sensor) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor Paper full Paper not full Bridge unit connection Not connected Connected © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 5...
Page 638 Tray at upper limit Other than upper position limit position LCF feed sensor No paper Paper present Empty sensor at LCF feed side Paper present No paper e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 6...
Page 639 (Refer to table1) RADF connection Connected Not connected Platen sensor Platen cove opened Platen cover closed Carriage home position sensor Home position Other than home position © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 7...
Page 640 Side cover open/close switch Cover opened Cover closed Drum mode detection signal Color Black Fuser unit connection Connected Not connected Key copy counter connection Not connected Connected e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 8...
Page 641 Postcard 8.5x8.5 / LT-R / A4-R / FOLIO KLG / 13"LG COMPUTER B4 / B5 H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 9...
Page 642 Drum thermistor-K Temperature [°C] (displays temperature on the drum surface of K color) Drum thermistor-Y Temperature [°C] (displays temperature on the drum surface of Y color) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 10...
Page 643 • It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 11...
Page 644: Output Check (Test Mode 03)
Code No.123 function OFF Sensor shutter solenoid ON (open) Code No.125 function OFF Image position aligning sensor (front/ Code No.126 function OFF rear) LED ON e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 12...
Page 645 LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 13...
Page 646 Laser unit cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Switching regulator cooling fan ON/OFF Internal cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Internal cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 14...
Page 647: Test Print Mode (Test Mode 04)
[K(4)] .....The developer units of four (YMCK) colors are brought into contact with the transferbelt, but the test pattern is printed in K color only. * The number in parentheses indicates the contact of the developer unit and the transfer belt. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE...
Page 648: List Printing
(Latest 80 items) Firmware upgrade log (Maximum 200 items) (Maximum 200 items) Power ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items) (Maximum 100 items) Version list All CSV files e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 16...
Page 649 The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list. See the following page for the adjustment code (05):  P.24-1 "24. ADJUSTMENT MODE (05)" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE...
Page 650 The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list. See the following page for the setting code (08):  P.25-1 "25. SETTING MODE (08)" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 18...
Page 651 PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the following page for PM:  P.19-1 "19. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE...
Page 652 Fig. 23-6 Pixel counter data (toner cartridge reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel counter:  P.25-193 "25.9 Pixel counter" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 20...
Page 653 Fig. 23-7 Pixel counter data (service call reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel counter:  P.25-193 "25.9 Pixel counter" © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 21...
Page 654 E724 00000137 071226-140650 064 064 3422_1000_011 Fig. 23-8 The error history is output. See the following page for the parameters for each error:  P.26-22 "26.2.4 Printer function error" e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 22...
Page 655 Printer counter data (full color) when the ROM was downloaded LIST List print counter data when the ROM was downloaded Fax print counter data when the ROM was downloaded © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 23...
Page 656 Whether the power was turned ON or OFF, or if it was turned ON or OFF with a remote reset function TOTAL Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then back ON e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 24...
Page 657 : 512 MB INSTALLED ELK NAME : Data overwrite enabler IPSec enabler Meta scan enabler External interface enabler Fig. 23-11 The list of versions is output. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 23 - 25...
Page 659: Adjustment Mode (05)
8251-0 to 4, 8252-0 to 4, 8253-0 to 4, 8254-0 to 4, 8340, 8341, 8342, 8344, 8345, 8346, 8348, 8349, 8350, 8371, 8380, 8381, 8382 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 1...
Page 660 [Line width minimum 8240 value adjustment] [Reproduction level 7841 1725, adjustment] [Maximum text 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633 density] [Background/Black 1075, 1076, 1077 density] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 2...
Page 661 7770, 7771, 7772, 7773, 7774, 7775, 7776, 7777, 7778, 8330, 8331, 8332, 8334, 8361, 8362, 8363, 8365 Color [Color registration 4719, 4720 registration adjustment] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 3...
Page 662 Laser [Polygonal motor] 4703, 4704, 4758, 4759 401, 405, Developer [Auto-toner] 205-0 to 3, 2409-0 to 3, 2411 200, 201, 202, 203, 204 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 4...
Page 663 2629-0 to 1, 2630-0 to 1 [Aligning amount] 354, 355 RADF [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Binding/Folding 468-0 to 2 Finisher position] [Equipment number] Maintenance [Maintenance] 4721 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 5...
Page 664: Operating Procedure
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. * Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button. Procedure 7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 6...
Page 665 In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05)
Page 666: Test Print Pattern In Adjustment Mode (05)
Printer gamma correction table creation pattern Refer to 8.7.1Automatic gamma adjustment (Thick paper 1) Printer gamma correction table confirmation Refer to 8.7.1Automatic gamma adjustment pattern (Thick paper 1) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 8...
Page 667 Refer to 8.6.1Automatic gamma adjustment (Color / Thick paper 3) Copier gamma adjustment pattern Refer to 8.6.1Automatic gamma adjustment (Color & black integrated / Thick paper 4) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 9...
Page 668 Refer to 8.6.1Automatic gamma adjustment (Color & black integrated / Special paper 2) Copier gamma confirmation pattern Refer to 8.6.1Automatic gamma adjustment (Color / Special paper 2) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 10...
Page 669: Process
331-1 power in the closed-loop <0-16> correction/ control mode 2. 331-2 Mode 2 <0-16> maximum 331-3 number of <0-16> time corrected © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 11...
Page 670 Image Laser power Displays the laser control actual value <0-999> power when printing is display operated. (Unit: µW) 384-1 <0-999> 384-2 <0-999> 384-3 <0-999> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 12...
Page 671 <0-255> adjustment value of this sensor sensor is the reference value to set the reflected light from the belt surface. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 13...
Page 672 <322- value of the laser power power 750> at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) 1802-1 <322- 750> 1802-2 <322- 750> 1802-3 <322- 750> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 14...
Page 673 <0-255> reference 2409-3 setting value <0-255> (YMCK) 2411 Develop High speed mode ment Adjustment of auto-toner <0-255> initial adjustment reference setting value (K(1)) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 15...
Page 674 428> at the image quality control. (Unit: µW) 2764 Charger Drum thermistor (Unit: °C) temperature display (Y) <0-100> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 16...
Page 675 <0-255> 2900-1, 3 2900-8 e-STUDIO2330C/ decelerati <0-255> 2820C/2830C/3520C/ 3530C: 2900-9 decelerati <0-255> e-STUDIO4520C: 2900-10 K(4) decelerati <0-255> 2900-11 K(1) decelerati <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 17...
Page 676 / High speed 2905-6 decelerati <0-10> 2905-7 decelerati <0-10> 2905-8 decelerati <0-10> 2905-9 decelerati <0-10> 2905-10 K(4) decelerati <0-10> 2905-11 K(1) decelerati <0-10> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 18...
Page 677 / High speed 2920-6 decelerati <0-255> 2920-7 decelerati <0-255> 2920-8 decelerati <0-255> 2920-9 decelerati <0-255> 2920-10 K(4) decelerati <0-255> 2920-11 K(1) decelerati <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 19...
Page 678 3530C: 2924-5 Special e-STUDIO4520C: paper 1 <0-255> 2924-6 Special paper 2 <0-255> 2924-7 Recycled Refer to paper content <0-255> 2924-8 Thick paper 4 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 20...
Page 679 2927-0, 7 2927-6 Special paper 2 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/ 2820C/2830C/3520C: 2927-7 Recycled Refer to paper content e-STUDIO3530C/ <0-255> 4520C: 2927-8 Thick paper 4 <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 21...
Page 680 <0-10> 10: 2.0 cies 2936-5 Special paper 1 <0-10> 2936-6 Special paper 2 <0-10> 2936-7 Recycled paper <0-10> 2936-8 Thick paper 4 <0-10> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 22...
Page 681 Special 8: 1.6 9: 1.8 paper 1 <0-10> 10: 2.0 2939-6 Special paper 2 <0-10> 2939-7 Recycled paper <0-10> 2939-8 Thick paper 4 <0-10> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 23...
Page 682 <0-7> 2: 3times 3: 5times cleaning at High 4: 7times 5: 10times image quality speed 6: 12times 7: 15times control end 2963-1 Decelerati <0-7> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 24...
Page 683 2987-1 High 6000 value (C) <300- 8200> 2988-0 Transfer 1st transfer bias constant- <300- voltage 8200> calibration 2988-1 High 6000 value (K) <300- 8200> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 25...
Page 684: Image Processing
591-2 High density (black) <0-255> 592-0 Image Gamma balance density (black) <0-255> adjustment 592-1 Medium (Photo) density (black) <0-255> 592-2 High density (black) <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 26...
Page 685 (black) <0-255> Image Density Text The larger the value is, adjustment (black) <0-255> the darker the image Automatic becomes. Text/Photo adjustment (black) <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 27...
Page 686 Image Smudged/ User 0: Faint text is faint text custom (black) <0-4> suppressed most. adjustment 4: Smudged text is suppressed most. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 28...
Page 687 4 colors can be corrected with the automatic gamma adjustment. • The result of the correction above will be applied to all media types. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 29...
Page 688 Automatic/ becomes. 1586 Text Manual (color) <0-255> adjustment/ 1587 Printed Center value image (color) <0-255> 1588 Photo (color) <0-255> 1589 (color) <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 30...
Page 689 1644-6 Thick correction above will paper 4 (color) be applied for each media type. 1644-7 Special paper 1 (color) 1644-8 Special paper 2 (color) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 31...
Page 690 5: Text-oriented 2 (The reproduction level of text is higher than that of text-oriented e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 32...
Page 691 (color) <0-6>  P.8-46 "8.6.10 Color 1769-2 Cyan Adjustment of Marker" (color) <0-6> 1769-3 (color) <0-6> 1769-4 Green (color) <0-6> 1769-5 Blue (color) <0-6> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 33...
Page 692 “Y” (Photo) 1782-1 (color) <0-255> 1782-2 (color) <0-255> 1783-0 Image Color balance adjustment for (color) <0-255> “Y” (Map) 1783-1 (color) <0-255> 1783-2 (color) <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 34...
Page 693 “C” (Printed 1791-1 image) (color) <0-255> 1791-2 (color) <0-255> 1792-0 Image Color balance adjustment for (color) <0-255> “C” (Photo) 1792-1 (color) <0-255> 1792-2 (color) <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 35...
Page 694 Image Text Automatic (black) <0-255> density adjustment) 7041 Image Background Text/Photo adjustment (black) <0-255> (Black / 7042 Image Text Manual (black) <0-255> density adjustment) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 36...
Page 695 0: Background peak - correction (black) <0-1> Fixed adjustment 1: Background peak - 7287 Image Text (Black / Varied (black) <0-1> Manual density adjustment) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 37...
Page 696 (XPS / Detail / becomes higher. (black) <0-255> 600dpi) L: Low density area 7320-2 M: Medium density (black) <0-255> area H: High density area e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 38...
Page 697 (Black / Manual density adjustment) 7468 Image Background offset The larger the value is, adjustment for ADF (black) <0-255> the lighter the background becomes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 39...
Page 698 (color) <0-255> recognized as colors other than red becomes. L: Low density area M: Medium density area H: High density area e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 40...
Page 699 The larger the value is, adjustment (color) <0-255> the lighter the (Twin color / background becomes. 7760 Text Manual (color) <0-255> density 7761 Printed adjustment) image (color) <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 41...
Page 700 1: Background peak - (Full color / Varied Automatic adjustment) 7778 Image Range User correction custom (color) <0-1> adjustment (Full color / Manual adjustment) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 42...
Page 701 (Black / Image the target area (black) <0-255> smoothing) becomes. 7956-2 L: Low density area (black) <0-255> M: Medium density area H: High density area © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 43...
Page 702 (Smooth / background becomes. 8010-1 Color / 600 The smaller the value (color) <0-255> dpi) is, the lighter the 8010-2 background becomes. (color) <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 44...
Page 703 (color) <0-255> (XPS/smooth/ 8044-1 (color) <0-255> 8044-2 (color) <0-255> 8045-0 Image Color balance adjustment (color) <0-255> (XPS/smooth/ 8045-1 (color) <0-255> 8045-2 (color) <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 45...
Page 704 / C) (color) <0-255> 8052-2 (color) <0-255> 8053-0 Image Color balance adjustment (color) <0-255> (PS / Smooth 8053-1 / K) (color) <0-255> 8053-2 (color) <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 46...
Page 705 Smooth / C) (color) <0-255> 8060-2 (color) <0-255> 8061-0 Image Color balance adjustment (color) <0-255> (PCL / 8061-1 Smooth / K) (color) <0-255> 8061-2 (color) <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 47...
Page 706 0: Adjusts color balance with the solid image density fixed 1: Adjusts color balance with the solid image density varied e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 48...
Page 707 Use this code (EFI) (color) <0-1> in cases such as fine 8103-2 lines being excessively (EFI) (color) <0-1> emphasized. 0: OFF 1: ON © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 49...
Page 708 (rougher image) 8179 Image Screen switchover 0: High screen ruling (EFI) (EFI) (color) <0-1> value (smoother image) 1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 50...
Page 709 General adjustment with black becomes. (color) <1-255> (Twin color The smaller the value 8215 General print) is, the narrower the (color) <1-255> range becomes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 51...
Page 710 (PS / Text) The smaller the value 8252-2 Presentati is, the narrower the (color) <1-255> range becomes. 8252-3 Line Art (color) <1-255> 8252-4 Advanced (color) <1-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 52...
Page 711 <0-255> / Dark step panel. 8350 Photo value The larger the value is, (color) <0-255> the darker the image of the “dark” step becomes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 53...
Page 712 / Dark step mode density adjustment on value the control panel The larger the value is, the darker the image of the dark steps becomes. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 54...
Page 713 The smaller the value 8408 Gray scale adjustment) is, the more easily the (black) <0-255> background (low 8409 User density area) is printed. custom (black) <0-255> mode © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 55...
Page 714: System
10: Low compression, high image quality 9107 Image Resolution adjustment of 0: 75dpi SLIM PDF background (color) <0-3> 1: 100dpi processing 2: 150dpi 3: 200dpi e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 56...
Page 715: Scanner
<0-255> increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0423 mm. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 57...
Page 716 / reproduction ratio correction value in primary scanning direction) from the SRAM of the SYS board to the SRAM of the SLG board. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 58...
Page 717 RADF for double shifts toward the trailing sided <0-100> edge of paper by original approx. 0.2 mm. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 59...
Page 718: Printer
(blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Image Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 60...
Page 719 (Normal trailing edge of the drawer <0-100> speed) paper by approx. Bypass 0.1 mm. feeding <0-100> PFP upper drawer <0-100> Duplex feeding <0-100> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 61...
Page 720 0.25 mm. 468-2 A3/LD position <-14-14> Paper Paper feed aligning Press the button on the feeding amount adjustment (using LCD. icons) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 62...
Page 721 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/ 485-5 2820C/2830C/3520C/ <0-255> 3530C: 136 (Except for 485-6 Transport NAD), 124 (NAD) speed: <0-255> e-STUDIO4520C: High 485-7 speed <0-255> 485-8 <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 63...
Page 722 <0-255> rotational 489-2 speed <0-255> 489-3 Transport speed: <0-255> Decelerati 489-4 <0-255> 489-5 <0-255> 489-6 Transport speed: <0-255> High 489-7 speed <0-255> 489-8 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 64...
Page 723 When the value position items <0-200> increases by “1”, the adjustment image shifts toward the (Decelerated) trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.1 mm. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 65...
Page 724 Short size 2: paper <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4101-4 Plain paper <0-63> Short size e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 66...
Page 725 2 <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4105-4 Thick paper 2 <0-63> Short size © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 67...
Page 726 Short size 2: paper <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4108-4 Plain paper <0-63> Short size e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 68...
Page 727 Paper aligning amount When the value feeding adjustment at the <0-63> increases by “1”, the registration section (LCF) aligning amount increases by approx. 0.6 mm. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 69...
Page 728 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size 4115-4 Thick paper 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 70...
Page 729 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size 4116-4 Thick paper 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 71...
Page 730 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size 4117-4 Thick paper 1/ <0-63> Thick paper 2/ Thick paper 3 Short size e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 72...
Page 731 1 <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4120-4 Thick paper 1 <0-63> Short size © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 73...
Page 732 Short size 2: paper <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4124-4 Plain paper <0-63> Short size e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 74...
Page 733 Short size 2: paper <0-63> 160 mm to 204 mm Short size Short size 3: 159 mm or shorter 4127-4 Plain paper <0-63> Short size © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 75...
Page 734 4567-2 Thick 0.1 mm. paper 3 <0-100> 4567-3 OHP film <0-100> 4567-4 Special paper 1 <0-100> 4567-5 Special paper 2 <0-100> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 76...
Page 735 Color registration Forcibly performs the registrati adjustment color registration control adjustment in order to eliminate the color deviation of Y, M, C and K colors. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 77...
Page 736 <0-100> the longer the interval determination of color registration control interval of the color registration control becomes. (Unit: Temperature value x 10) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) 24 - 78...
Page 737: Setting Mode (08)
286, 289, 331, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642 [Jam releasing] 9359 [Offsetting between jobs] [Security level] 1708 [Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649 [Timer] 204, 205, 206 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 1...
Page 738 Image control [Automatic starting] 559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572 [Smoothing] [Laser power] 2525-0 to 3, 2526-0 to 3, 557, 2527 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 2...
Page 739 4563 switching] Paper exit [Duplex reversing position 4564 correction control] [1st transfer] 816, 2512 [2nd transfer] 2490 Transfer [Resistance detection] 2511 [Transfer bias] 2510 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 3...
Page 740 RADF [Switchback] [Stapling] 704-0 to 1, 1911, 9811-0 to 3, 9937-0 to 3, 9938-0 to 3 Finisher [Hole punching] 9847 [Finisher model switching] 1912 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 4...
Page 741 1016, 1138, 1923, 1924, 3743, 9629 [LLTD] 3793 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077 [MAC address] 1141, 8805 [MIB] 1063 [Network logs] 8535, 8536 [NDS] 1027 [NIC] 1002 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 5...
Page 742 1484, 1486, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 3722, 3723, 3724 [Print queue] 1096 [Prefix] 3771 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 6...
Page 743 310-0 to 23, 311-0 to 23, 312-0 to 23, 313-0 to 23, 314-0 to 23, 315-0 to 23, 316-0 to 23, 6027-0 to 23, 6078-0 to 3 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 7...
Page 744 5569, 5570, 5571, 5572, 5573, 5574, 5575, 5576, 5577, 5578, 5579, 5580, 5581, 5582, 5583, 5584, 5585, 6192, 6193, 6196, 6197 [Error history] [Equipment number] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 8...
Page 745 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, [Telephone] [Panel calibration] Electronic Filing [Setting] 267, 270, 950, 976, 1497 [HDD] 1422, 1424, 1426 Data overwrite enabler [SRAM] 1428 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 9...
Page 746 [Department management] [Private print] 8537 [BANNER MESSAGE button] [Memory] [User data management] 1468, 1469, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483, 1496 [Line] [Duplex printing] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 10...
Page 747 8524 [ACS release] 8529-0 to 2, 8530-0 to 2, 8531-0 to 2, [Panel] 8532 [Hardcopy security printing] 9883, 9884 [Electronic key] 3840, 3841, 3842 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 11...
Page 748: Operating Procedure
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [START] (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] (Code) (Setting) [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) Procedure 9 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 12...
Page 749 [CANCEL] [ENTER] [0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] [START] [START] [POWER] (Code) (Sub-code) OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) Adjustment value [CLEAR] cannot be changed (Corrects value) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 13...
Page 750: Process
14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16: 115°C 17: 120°C 18: 125°C 19: 130°C 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 14...
Page 751 Thick paper 3) 8: 160°C 9: 165°C size paper <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 15...
Page 752 <0-16> 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 16...
Page 753 14: 105°C 15: 110°C 16: 115°C 17: 120°C 18: 125°C 19: 130°C 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 17...
Page 754 Extra long paper 1) 8: 160°C 9: 165°C size paper <0-16> 10: 170°C 11: 175°C 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 14: 190°C 15: 195°C 16: 200°C e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 18...
Page 755 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 19...
Page 756 1: Valid Image Image quality closed-loop Sets whether or not control control/Laser power <0-1> correcting the laser power in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 20...
Page 757 0: Invalid 1: Valid (mode1: for Quick Image Quality Control) 2: Valid (mode2: for Standard Image Quality Control) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 21...
Page 758 Image Abnormality detection Counts the abnormality control count (Y) <0-16> detection of image Display/0 clearing quality control. Accumulating total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 22...
Page 759 Sets ON or OFF of the processi toner cartridge is nearly <0-1> detection/control that empty the toner cartridge is nearly empty. 0: OFF 1: ON © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 23...
Page 760 14: 20sec. 15: 25sec. paper 1 / <0-16> 16: 30sec. Extra long size paper 2020-3 Special paper 2 / <0-16> Extra long size paper e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 24...
Page 761 20: 135°C 21: 140°C 22: 145°C 23: 150°C 24: 155°C 25: 160°C 2367 Cleaner ON/OFF setting of drum 0: OFF reverse rotation amount <0-1> 1: ON control © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 25...
Page 762 Main charger open-loop 0: Invalid control for resistance <0-1> 1: Valid detection 2512 Transfer 1st transfer life count 0: Invalid control switching <0-1> 1: Valid e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 26...
Page 763 Since toner density in the color developer unit is checked at every number of sheets set in 08-2693, the performance will be lowered. 0: OFF 1: ON © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 27...
Page 764 5241-1 Pressure roller <0-4> (at normal temperatu res) 5241-2 Fuser roller <0-4> (at low temperatu res) 5241-3 Pressure roller <0-4> (at low temperatu res) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 28...
Page 765 UC: 9 12: 180°C 13: 185°C JPN: 8 14: 190°C 15: 195°C <0-16> 16: 200°C 5285-3 Fuser EUR: 9 (color) UC: 9 JPN: 8 <0-16> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 29...
Page 766 e-STUDIO2330C / 2820C / 2830C / 3520C: e-STUDIO3530C / 4520C: 5293-3 e-STUDIO2330C / 2820C / 2830C / 3520C / 3530C: e-STUDIO4520C: e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 30...
Page 767 At low paper(Sub 10: 170°C 11: 175°C temperatu (black) <0-16> heater) 12: 180°C 13: 185°C 5295-3 14: 190°C 15: 195°C (color) <0-16> 16: 200°C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 31...
Page 768 Recycled 10: 170°C 11: 175°C <0-12> paper(Center 12: Disable & side thermistors) e-STUDIO2330C / 2820C / 2830C / 3520C / 3530C: e-STUDIO4520C: e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 32...
Page 769 5449-2 Thick paper 3 <0-1> 5449-3 Thick paper 4 <0-1> 5449-4 Special paper 1 <0-1> 5449-5 Special paper 2 <0-1> 5449-6 OHP film <0-1> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 33...
Page 770: Scanner
The same as that of APS in 0: Disabled. 3015 Scanner Pre-scan setting 0: Not performing pre- switchover <0-1> scanning 1: Performing pre- scanning e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 34...
Page 771: Printer
432/140- 297> Paper Paper size (LG) 356/216 feeding feeding/widthwise direction <182- 432/140- 297> Paper Paper size (ST-R) 216/140 feeding feeding/widthwise direction <182- 432/140- 297> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 35...
Page 772 Sets the number of feeding number paper <0-5> times of the feeding setting (PFP retry from the PFP 466-1 Others lower drawer) lower drawer. <0-5> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 36...
Page 773 Paper Feeding retry setting 0: ON feeding <0-1> 1: OFF Paper Feeding retry setting 0: ON (EFI) feeding <0-1> 1: OFF © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 37...
Page 774 Polygonal motor rotation in 0: Stopped the energy saving mode <0-3> 1: 10000rpm. 1902 Fuser Fusing error temperature (Temperature of the fuser <0-255> roller center thermopiles) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 38...
Page 775 4549 Fuser Judgment of new or used 0: Valid fuser unit <0-1> 1: Invalid © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 39...
Page 776 4: Mix for 15 seconds detection 5: Mix for 20 seconds 4561 Develop Detection of the lockup of 0: Valid ment used toner mixing paddles <0-1> 1: Invalid e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 40...
Page 777 Checking of SRAM board Refer to data on LGC board No. 1 content 450:e-STUDIO2820C (Models) <450- 451:e-STUDIO2830C 454> 452:e-STUDIO3520C 453:e-STUDIO3530C 454:e-STUDIO4520C 455:e-STUDIO2330C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 41...
Page 778 Check data 12 <0-255> 4587-12 Check data 13 <0-255> 4587-13 Check data 14 <0-255> 4587-14 Check data 15 <0-255> 4587-15 Check data 16 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 42...
Page 779 Check data 12 <0-255> 4588-12 Check data 13 <0-255> 4588-13 Check data 14 <0-255> 4588-14 Check data 15 <0-255> 4588-15 Check data 16 <0-255> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 43...
Page 780 Check data 12 <0-255> 4589-12 Check data 13 <0-255> 4589-13 Check data 14 <0-255> 4589-14 Check data 15 <0-255> 4589-15 Check data 16 <0-255> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 44...
Page 781 Enable/Disable <0-1> 1: Enable 4604 Laser Polygonal motor standby 0: 0 sec. rotationShift waiting time <0-9> 1 to 9: Setting value x 5 sec. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 45...
Page 782 When a job is ended: 1 count When a print job is paused: 1 count 4766 Paper RAM phase adjustment 0: Invalid feeding control setting <0-1> 1: Valid e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 46...
Page 783: Counter
301-21 Extra long size paper 301-22: Feeding direction: 800
Page 784 460
Page 785 460
Page 786 460
Page 787 460
Page 788 307-21 Extra long size paper 307-22: Feeding direction: 800
Page 789 308-21 Extra long size paper 308-22: Feeding direction: 800
Page 790 460
Page 791 460
Page 792 460
Page 793 460
Page 794 460
Page 795 314-21 Extra long size paper 314-22: Feeding direction: 800
Page 796 315-21 Extra long size paper 315-22: Feeding direction: 800
Page 797 08- Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 61...
Page 798 08- Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 62...
Page 799 08- Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 63...
Page 800 08- Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 64...
Page 801 08- Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 65...
Page 802 0: Counted as 1 sized paper (PM) <0-1> 1: Counted as 2 Counter Definition setting of large 0: A3/LD sized paper (PM) <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 66...
Page 803 Laser Accumulated time of Accumulates the time polygonal motor at normal <8 digits> the polygonal motor has rotation rotated at normal rotation. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 67...
Page 804 Number of output pages Counts up when the processi (Thick paper 1) <8 digits> registration sensor is ON in the thick paper 1 mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 68...
Page 805 Paper Feeding retry counter feeding upper limit value <8 digits> (bypass feed) 1401 Paper Feeding retry counter feeding upper limit value (LCF) <8 digits> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 69...
Page 806 [4IN1]. 1530-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the black mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 70...
Page 807 [4IN1]. 1532-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the twin color mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 71...
Page 808 [N IN1]. 1533-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the black mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 72...
Page 809 3530C / 4520C: 70000 [Unit. page] 5551 Maintena Setting value of PM time 170000 Time accumulating counter display/0 clearing / (color) <8 digits> counter © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 73...
Page 810 70000 [Unit. page] 5559 Maintena Setting value of PM time 125000 Time accumulating counter display/0 clearing / (color) <8 digits> counter Developer material (M) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 74...
Page 811 (M) 5574 Maintena Current value of PM Counts up when the counter Display/0 clearing / (color) <8 digits> registration sensor is Developer material (C) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 75...
Page 812 0: PM counter (The number of output pages is set at 08- 251.) 1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-375.) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 76...
Page 813 1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-375.) 6018 Counter Count setting of special 0: Counted as 1 paper <0-1> 1: Counted as 2 (PM) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 77...
Page 814 (color) <8 digits> registration sensor is 6197 Maintena Current value of PM time Counts the drum driving counter / Y (color) <8 digits> time. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 78...
Page 815 6453-1 Remaining 41800 level <8 digits> threshold: 6453-2 Remaining 83600 level <8 digits> threshold: 6453-3 Remaining 125400 level <8 digits> threshold: © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 79...
Page 816 [N IN1]. 6806-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the twin color mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 80...
Page 817 [4IN1]. 6811-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (color) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the full color mode. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 81...
Page 818 [N IN1]. 6813-7 1-UP / Counts the number of Simplex (black) <8 digits> output pages printed printing only in the black mode. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 82...
Page 819 (black) <8 digits> output pages in the of the FAX printing default settings. printing / 6815-7 1-UP / Large Duplex (black) <8 digits> printing © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 83...
Page 820 (color) <8 digits> ACS job is printed. counter 6850-1 printer job (color) <8 digits> counter 6850-2 Total ACS PPC/ <8 digits> counter (color) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 84...
Page 821 Displays each value of color (color) <8 digits> ACS total counters. counter 6857-1 ACS total black (black) <8 digits> counter 6857-2 ACS total counter <8 digits> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 85...
Page 822 Counter 6860-1 ACS print mode <8 digits> change (Black -> Color) Counter 6860-2 ACS print mode <8 digits> change Total counter IN e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 86...
Page 823 Counter 6863-1 ACS print mode <8 digits> change (Black -> Color) Counter 6863-2 ACS print mode <8 digits> change Total counter © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 87...
Page 824 Counts up 6901 Counter Total counter (in Plain when the registration paper Black Mode <8 digits> sensor is ON. : e-STUDIO3530C only) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 88...
Page 825 Number of output <8 digits> pages at the last replaceme 6907-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6907-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 89...
Page 826 Number of output <8 digits> pages at the last replaceme 6926-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6926-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 90...
Page 827 6929-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6929-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 91...
Page 828 6932-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6932-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 92...
Page 829 Number of output <8 digits> pages at the last replaceme 6950-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6950-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 93...
Page 830 Number of output <8 digits> pages at the last replaceme 6960-2 Present drive <8 digits> counts 6960-3 Drive counts at <8 digits> the last replaceme e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 94...
Page 831 “0” (no limit). The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08)
Page 832: Image Processing
949-0 to 2, 7025, 7033, 7034, 7041, 7042, 7043, 7044, 7048, 7049, 604, 7102, 7103, 7236, 7237, 7279, 7280, 7283, 7284, 7286, 7287, 7295, 7296 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 96...
Page 833 8212-0 to 3, 8213, 8214, 8215, 8218, 8249-0 to 4, 8250-0 to 4, 8251-0 to 4, 8252-0 to 4, 8253-0 to 4, 8254-0 to 4 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 97...
Page 834 (color) <0-255> Standard ratio becomes and the 8304-2 JPEG images larger the value is, the quality (color) <0-255> lower the compression ratio becomes. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 98...
Page 835: System
0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 99...
Page 836 Web power ON UC: 0 1: Language 2 JPN: 5 2: Language 3 <0-6> 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 100...
Page 837 Administrator's password 123456 The password can be interface (Maximum 10 digits) <10 entered in alphabets digits> and figures (A-Z, a-z and 0-9) within 10 digits. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 101...
Page 838 Sets the days left the mail saving time limit <0-99> notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 102...
Page 839 Default setting of resolution 0: 150 dpi interface (Black) (black) <0-5> 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400 dpi 4: 600 dpi 5: 100 dpi © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 103...
Page 840 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 5: Thick paper 4 Network Raw printing job 0: Portrait (Paper direction) <0-1> 1: Landscape e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 104...
Page 841 <0-1> the number of pages of original glass originals placed on the original glass is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 105...
Page 842 3: User selection User Default setting for APS/ 0: APS (Automatic interface <0-2> Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 106...
Page 843 <0-2> 1: Not printed 2: Deleted forcibly User Default setting of RADF 0: Same size originals interface original size <0-1> 1: Mixed size originals © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 107...
Page 844 1: Inner receiving tray User Width setting for image 0: ON interface shift copying (linkage of <0-1> 1: OFF front side and back side) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 108...
Page 845 Correction ratio”. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 109...
Page 846 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 110...
Page 847 In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 111...
Page 848 “Banner advertising display 1 (08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on the control panel. Offsetting between jobs 0: Invalid interface <0-1> 1: Valid e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 112...
Page 849 General Performing HDD testing Checks the bad sector. General Default setting of the EFI Performs when the EFI Printer Board Printer Board is used © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 113...
Page 850 1230 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59) periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Maintena Remote-controlled service 0: Prohibited Writing data of self- <0-1> 1: Accepted diagnostic code e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 114...
Page 851 Maximum 192 letters function of supplies List: 256 digits (Remote) User's E-mail address Maintena Automatic ordering Maximum 100 letters function of supplies (Remote) User's address © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 115...
Page 852 Maintena Information about supplies Order quantity of toner <1-99> (Remote) cartridge K Maintena Information about supplies Condition number of toner <1-99> (Remote) cartridge K e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 116...
Page 853 Maintena Setting total counter transmission interval (Remote) (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Maintena Destination E-mail address Maximum 192 letters (Remote) Maintena Destination E-mail address Maximum 192 letters (Remote) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 117...
Page 854 Engine ROM version 450M-XXX Version Scanner ROM version 450S-XXX Version RADF ROM version DF-XXXX Version Finisher ROM version SDL-XXX FIN-XXX Version Finisher punch ROM PUN-XXX version e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 118...
Page 855 General Automatic interruption Sets the number of page number setting for <0-100> pages to interrupt the printing printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 119...
Page 856 Raw printing job 0: AUTO (Paper feeding drawer) <0-5> 1: 1st drawer 2: 2nd drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer 5: LCF e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 120...
Page 857 <10 keyed in from the digits> adjustment mode (05- 976). 10 digits Maintena FSMS total counter Refer to values of total <8 digits> counter. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 121...
Page 858 255.255.255.252) The default value is reflected by performing 08-700 when the EFI Printer Board is connected. 1010 Network Gateway 000.000.000.000- 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 122...
Page 859 2: Valid 3: Valid 4: Valid 5: Valid 1021 Network Availability of SLP Sets the availability of <1-2> SLP on NetWare. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 123...
Page 860 Network FQDN or IP address to Maximum 128 Bytes POP3 server 1048 Network Types of POP3 server 1: Automatic <1-3> 2: POP3 3: APOP e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 124...
Page 861 EFI Printer Board is connected. 1076 Network TCP port number of LPD <1- 65535> 1077 Network LPD queue name Maximum 31 letters © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 125...
Page 862 Maximum 47 letters server serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at “serial” 1094 Network Login password to Novell Maximum 31 letters print server e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 126...
Page 863 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid 1112 Network Host name MFP_ Maximum 63 letters serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at “serial” © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 127...
Page 864 LDAP search method Sets the search method setting <0-3> when performing a LDAP search. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 128...
Page 865 “Right”, <2-100/ even if the value less -100- than 2 is set for “Back”. 100> 1430 User Margin width interface (Bookbinding margin) <2-30> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 129...
Page 866 1451 Network Password for IPP This should be the authentication password of the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 130...
Page 867 LDAP server 1478 User Display of paper size JPN: 0 0: Not displayed interface setting by installation UC/EUR: 1: Displayed operation of drawers <0-1> © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 131...
Page 868 10: 1 year 11: 5 years 12: Not limited (= Calls service technician if such error has occurred in the past even once or more) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 132...
Page 869 <1-2> 1676 Wireless Wireless LAN driver Number of times of <0-1000> software retry 1677 Wireless Wireless LAN driver 1: Long Preamble <1-2> 2: Longshort © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 133...
Page 870 Session resume <1-2> the pre-master key should be updated or not upon a TLS re- negotiation. 1: Session is resumed 2: Session is not resumed e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 134...
Page 871 Wireless LAN supplicant The encryption Security level <1-3> capability output in TLS client Hello message can be selected. 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 135...
Page 872 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) 1723 Network IP address range for IP IP filter maximum area filter (Maximum area 2) 000.000.000.000- 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 136...
Page 873 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) 1734 Network IP address range for IP IP filter minimum area 8 filter 000.000.000.000- (Minimum area 8) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 137...
Page 874 2: Invalid 3: Use the imported certification. 1747 Network SSL setting Port number to LDAP SSL LDAP Client Port <1- Server 65535> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 138...
Page 875 The Host Name Vendor address acquired by DHCP <1-2> Extension option (12) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 139...
Page 876 1: Enabled 2: Disabled This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 1768 Network Previous IP address 000.000.000.000- 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 140...
Page 877 “MMMM”. KP-2003: LLLL: System code (hexadecimal number) MMMM: Service code (hexadecimal number) KP-2005: LLLL : Key information MMMM: Sector number (hexadecimal number) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 141...
Page 878 6: 15 min. 7: 30 min. 1779 Network Default data saving 0: Local directory directory of “Scan to File” <0-2> 1: REMOTE 1 2: REMOTE 2 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 142...
Page 879 4: [HH][mm][SS] [YYYY][MM][DD][H H][mm][SS][mm0] The order of [YY], [MM] and [DD] varies depending on the setting of the code 08- 640 (Data display format). © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 143...
Page 880 1790-3 MS_OP_ displayed at the same 03.icc time.) 1790-4 MS_OP_ 04.icc 1790-5 MS_OP_ 05.icc 1790-6 MS_OP_ 06.icc 1790-7 MS_OP_ 07.icc 1790-8 MS_OP_ 08.icc e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 144...
Page 881 1790-28 MS_OP_ 28.icc 1790-29 MS_OP_ 29.icc 1790-30 MS_OP_ 30.icc 1790-31 MS_OP_ 31.icc 1790-32 MS_OP_ 32.icc 1790-33 MS_OP_ 33.icc 1790-34 MS_OP_ 34.icc 1790-35 MS_OP_ 35.icc © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 145...
Page 882 24: MS_OP_24 25: MS_OP_25 26: MS_OP_26 27: MS_OP_27 28: MS_OP_28 29: MS_OP_29 30: MS_OP_30 31: MS_OP_31 32: MS_OP_32 33: MS_OP_33 34: MS_OP_34 35: MS_OP_35 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 146...
Page 883 24: MS_OP_24 25: MS_OP_25 26: MS_OP_26 27: MS_OP_27 28: MS_OP_28 29: MS_OP_29 30: MS_OP_30 31: MS_OP_31 32: MS_OP_32 33: MS_OP_33 34: MS_OP_34 35: MS_OP_35 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 147...
Page 884 1794-3 MS_OP_ displayed at the same 03.000 time.) 1794-4 MS_OP_ 04.000 1794-5 MS_OP_ 05.000 1794-6 MS_OP_ 06.000 1794-7 MS_OP_ 07.000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 148...
Page 885 1794-27 MS_OP_ 27.000 1794-28 MS_OP_ 28.000 1794-29 MS_OP_ 29.000 1794-30 MS_OP_ 30.000 1794-31 MS_OP_ 31.000 1794-32 MS_OP_ 32.000 1794-33 MS_OP_ 33.000 1794-34 MS_OP_ 34.000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 149...
Page 886 24: MS_OP_24 25: MS_OP_25 26: MS_OP_26 27: MS_OP_27 28: MS_OP_28 29: MS_OP_29 30: MS_OP_30 31: MS_OP_31 32: MS_OP_32 33: MS_OP_33 34: MS_OP_34 35: MS_OP_35 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 150...
Page 887 24: MS_OP_24 25: MS_OP_25 26: MS_OP_26 27: MS_OP_27 28: MS_OP_28 29: MS_OP_29 30: MS_OP_30 31: MS_OP_31 32: MS_OP_32 33: MS_OP_33 34: MS_OP_34 35: MS_OP_35 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 151...
Page 888 1798-2 MS_OP_ 02.001 1798-3 MS_OP_ 03.001 1798-4 MS_OP_ 04.001 1798-5 MS_OP_ 05.001 1798-6 MS_OP_ 06.001 1798-7 MS_OP_ 07.001 1798-8 MS_OP_ 08.001 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 152...
Page 889 Addition of the page 0: Valid (Page number number to the multi-page <0-1> not added) file name of a File/Email 1: Invalid (Page number added) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 153...
Page 890 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 1934 User Key arrangement for 0: QWERTY layout interface language 6 <0-2> (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 154...
Page 891 BDC2 of user Maximum 128 letters authentication 1956 Network PDC3 of user Maximum 128 letters authentication 1957 Network BDC3 of user Maximum 128 letters authentication © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 155...
Page 892 Key in the value 10 <96-160> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in “100” for a font size 10.0.) 1974 General KS Zoom <20-400> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 156...
Page 893 10.0.) 1988 General KSSM Zoom <20-400> 1989 General KSSM CR/LF Mode 0: CR->CR, LF->LF <0-3> 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 157...
Page 894 3600-1 MS_IS34_ RGB Ink Sim profile 01.icc and the same sub- 3600-2 MS_IS34_ code. 02.icc 3600-3 MS_IS34_ 03.icc 3600-4 MS_IS34_ 04.icc e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 158...
Page 895 3600-24 MS_IS34_ 24.icc 3600-25 MS_IS34_ 25.icc 3600-26 MS_IS34_ 26.icc 3600-27 MS_IS34_ 27.icc 3600-28 MS_IS34_ 28.icc 3600-29 MS_IS34_ 29.icc 3600-30 MS_IS34_ 30.icc 3600-31 MS_IS34_ 31.icc © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 159...
Page 896 24: MS_IS34_24 25: MS_IS34_25 26: MS_IS34_26 27: MS_IS34_27 28: MS_IS34_28 29: MS_IS34_29 30: MS_IS34_30 31: MS_IS34_31 32: MS_IS34_32 33: MS_IS34_33 34: MS_IS34_34 35: MS_IS34_35 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 160...
Page 897 24: MS_IS34_24 25: MS_IS34_25 26: MS_IS34_26 27: MS_IS34_27 28: MS_IS34_28 29: MS_IS34_29 30: MS_IS34_30 31: MS_IS34_31 32: MS_IS34_32 33: MS_IS34_33 34: MS_IS34_34 35: MS_IS34_35 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 161...
Page 898 PureGray TRC attribute 01.000 in the same sub-code. 3604-2 MS_IS34_ 02.000 3604-3 MS_IS34_ 03.000 3604-4 MS_IS34_ 04.000 3604-5 MS_IS34_ 05.000 3604-6 MS_IS34_ 06.000 3604-7 MS_IS34_ 07.000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 162...
Page 899 3604-27 MS_IS34_ 27.000 3604-28 MS_IS34_ 28.000 3604-29 MS_IS34_ 29.000 3604-30 MS_IS34_ 30.000 3604-31 MS_IS34_ 31.000 3604-32 MS_IS34_ 32.000 3604-33 MS_IS34_ 33.000 3604-34 MS_IS34_ 34.000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 163...
Page 900 24: MS_IS34_24 25: MS_IS34_25 26: MS_IS34_26 27: MS_IS34_27 28: MS_IS34_28 29: MS_IS34_29 30: MS_IS34_30 31: MS_IS34_31 32: MS_IS34_32 33: MS_IS34_33 34: MS_IS34_34 35: MS_IS34_35 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 164...
Page 901 24: MS_IS34_24 25: MS_IS34_25 26: MS_IS34_26 27: MS_IS34_27 28: MS_IS34_28 29: MS_IS34_29 30: MS_IS34_30 31: MS_IS34_31 32: MS_IS34_32 33: MS_IS34_33 34: MS_IS34_34 35: MS_IS34_35 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 165...
Page 902 GrayTRC attribute in 01.001 the same sub-code. 3608-2 MS_IS34_ 02.001 3608-3 MS_IS34_ 03.001 3608-4 MS_IS34_ 04.001 3608-5 MS_IS34_ 05.001 3608-6 MS_IS34_ 06.001 3608-7 MS_IS34_ 07.001 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 166...
Page 903 3608-27 MS_IS34_ 27.001 3608-28 MS_IS34_ 28.001 3608-29 MS_IS34_ 29.001 3608-30 MS_IS34_ 30.001 3608-31 MS_IS34_ 31.001 3608-32 MS_IS34_ 32.001 3608-33 MS_IS34_ 33.001 3608-34 MS_IS34_ 34.001 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 167...
Page 904 3725 Network IPP max connection <1-16> 3726 Network IPP active connection <1-16> 3727 Network LPD max connection <1-16> 3728 Network LPD active connection <1-16> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 168...
Page 905 [NIC serial number] 3750 General DPWS Printer Name Printer name used for installing the printer with DPWS TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Printer- [NIC serial number] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 169...
Page 906 DPWS print 3767 Network Switching IPv6 setting IPv6 function is <1-2> switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 170...
Page 907 An option is acquired <1-2> from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled 3781 Network Primary DNS Server Registration of Primary Address Registration <0-16> DNS Server Address (IPv6) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 171...
Page 908 Immediately responds to the host side after the completion of RIP. 1: (Unsolicited) - Responds to the host side after the printing is finished. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 172...
Page 909 This code is valid only when the code 08-629 is set “1 (Valid)”. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 173...
Page 910 PDF file version setting The version of PDF file <0-1> produced by the Scan function is set. 0: PDF V1.3 1: PDF V1.4 4: PDF V1.7 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 174...
Page 911 0: OFF 1: ON 3847 FAX mistransmission FAX mistransmission prevention <0-1> prevention function is switched. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 175...
Page 912 1: Enabled 3853 General Summer time 0: +2:00 Offset value <0-7> 1: +1:30 2: +1:00 3: +0:30 4: -0:30 5: -1:00 6: -1:30 7: -2:00 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 176...
Page 913 3862 General Summer time 0 to 23 Setting value <0-23> (Starting hour) 3863 General Summer time 0 to 59 Setting value <0-59> (Starting minute) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 177...
Page 914 <0-36> in secondary scanning direction 8509 General Controlling amount for print 0-36 (EFI) image position adjustment <0-36> in secondary scanning direction e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 178...
Page 915 0: Page Fit Default display type <0-1> 1: Width Fit 8528 General CPU clock control in sleep 0: Control performed mode <0-1> 1: Control not performed © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 179...
Page 916 e-STUDIO2330C / 2820C: e-STUDIO2830C / 3520C: e-STUDIO3530C: e-STUDIO4520C: 8530-2 e-STUDIO2330C / 2820C: e-STUDIO2830C / 3520C: e-STUDIO3530C: e-STUDIO4520C: Paper size x 10 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 180...
Page 917 0: Descending order 1: Ascending order 8800 Network Enabling / Disabling of 1: Enabled 802.1X <1-2> 2: Disabled © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 181...
Page 918 IKEv2: Enabled) 2: Enable IKEv1 & IKEv2 3: Disable IKEv1 & IKEv2 8821 Network IPsec CRL setting 1: Enable CRL <1-2> 2: Disable CRL e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 182...
Page 919 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed (for both copy and print) 9117 General Raw printing job 0: OFF Do not Print Blank Pages <0-1> 1: ON © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 183...
Page 920 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 8: Recycled paper Only “0”, “1”, “2”, “3” and “8” are acceptable. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 184...
Page 921 2: Encryption valid (Performance priority) Encrypts the user's data except the files temporarily created and deleted in the image processing such as copying or printing. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 185...
Page 922 (Enable) is set for 08- 9747. 9749 Network WIA Scan Driver Selects WIA Scan <1-2> Driver. 1: TTEC 2: Microsoft 9789 General Default repeat count Unit: times <2-8> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 186...
Page 923 “1” or higher, the 2nd transfer resistance detection is performed every time the number of pages of (setting value X 10) have output. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 187...
Page 924 <0-1> 1: Accepted parameter when recalling an extension 9889 General Status display of the USB 0: Accepted data cloning permission <0-1> 1: Prohibited e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 188...
Page 925 <1-11> 3: -3 4: -2 (Gray) 5: -1 6: 0 7: +1 8: +2 9: +3 10: +4 11: +5 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 189...
Page 926 Saddle stitch 9938-3 Thick3 <-15-15> 9945 Version Finisher Converter ROM CNV-XXX version 9946 General Number of Email 0 to 14 times transmission retries <0-14> e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 190...
Page 927 “1: To/Bcc” is selected in the code 08-9957. 0: OFF (Bcc address not displayed) 1: ON (Bcc address displayed) 9965 Version Imaging Acceleration I-XX.X.X Board SROM version © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 191...
Page 928 Fixes the receiver's function at authentication <0-1> address (“To: Destination” field) when the user authentication and E-mail authentication are enabled. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 192...
Page 929: Pixel Counter
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the copy function are as follows: © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08)
Page 930 Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08- 1502). e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 194...
Page 931 (%). Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 195...
Page 932 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 196...
Page 933 Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C) Y/10 X/10 6% 12% Pixel count (%) Fig. 25-2 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 197...
Page 934 When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is displayed. [TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 198...
Page 935 The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button. Fig. 25-6 Information screen of service technician reference (full color) The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08)
Page 936 Fig. 25-7 Information screen of service technician reference (black) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 200...
Page 937 Average Pixel Count[%] 6.15 3.86 23.25 5.74 11 20080208 Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19 Fig. 25-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 201...
Page 938 Average Pixel Count[%] 7.36 4.06 23.25 6.45 17 20080208 K Latest Pixel Count[%] 7.32 2.19 6.25 2.19 Fig. 25-9 Data list of service technician reference e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 202...
Page 939 1594 Latest pixel count 1608 Total Average pixel count 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1595 Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 203...
Page 940 The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored. 08-1511: Toner cartridge Y 08-1512: Toner cartridge M 08-1513: Toner cartridge C 08-1514: Toner cartridge K e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 204...
Page 941: Pixel Counter Related Code
08-1502 was performed. 1511 Pixel Toner cartridge reference Displays the date on counter cleared date (Y) (color) which 08-1503 was performed. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 205...
Page 942 (Service technician (black) output pages converted reference) to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 206...
Page 944 (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0- pixel count in the copy technician reference) 10000> function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 208...
Page 945 (C) (Service (color) <0- pixel count in the printer technician reference) 10000> function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 209...
Page 946 Displays the average counter (Service technician (black) <0- pixel count in the FAX reference) 10000> function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 210...
Page 947 (M) (Service technician (color) <0- count in the printer reference) 10000> function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 211...
Page 948 (K) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- pixel count in the copy reference) 10000> function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 212...
Page 949 (Y) (Toner cartridge <0- pixel count in the copy/ reference) (color) 10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 213...
Page 950 (Y) (Toner cartridge (color) <0- count in the printer reference) 10000> function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 214...
Page 951 <8 digits> (color) 1641-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (color) 1641-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (color) 1641-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (color) 1641-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (color) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 215...
Page 952 <8 digits> (color) 1643-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (color) 1643-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (color) 1643-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (color) 1643-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (color) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 216...
Page 953 <8 digits> (color) 1645-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (color) 1645-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (color) 1645-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (color) 1645-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (color) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 217...
Page 954 <8 digits> (color) 1647-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (color) 1647-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (color) 1647-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (color) 1647-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (color) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 218...
Page 955 <8 digits> (black) 1649-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (black) 1649-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (black) 1649-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (black) 1649-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (black) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 219...
Page 956 <8 digits> (black) 1651-6 30.1-40% <8 digits> (black) 1651-7 40.1-60% <8 digits> (black) 1651-8 60.1-80% <8 digits> (black) 1651-9 80.1- <8 digits> 100% (black) e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 220...
Page 957: Pm Support Mode Related Code
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/ 170,000/170,000/170,000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 221...
Page 958 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/ 170,000/170,000/170,000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 222...
Page 959 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/ 170,000/170,000/170,000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 223...
Page 960 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/ 125,000/125,000/125,000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 224...
Page 961 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 92,000/112,000/112,000/ 140,000/140,000/140,000 Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/ 340,000/340,000/340,000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 225...
Page 962 Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/ 80,000/80,000/80,000 Feed roller 1300-0,1,2,8 1301 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/ 80,000/80,000/80,000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 226...
Page 963 Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/ 80,000/80,000/80,000 Feed roller 1324-0,1,2,8 1325 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/ 80,000/80,000/80,000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 227...
Page 964 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/ 125,000/125,000/125,000 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 228...
Page 965 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 46,000/56,000/56,000/ 70,000/70,000/70,000 Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/ 125,000/125,000/125,000 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 229...
Page 966: Default Setting / Restore Setting Of The Efi Printer Board
Controlling amount for print image position adjustment in secondary scanning direction 8510 Menu display for controlling print image position adjustment in secondary scanning direction e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 230...
Page 967: S-Acs Setting (08-9934)
[ Black ] - > [ Full Color ] switching Switching operation [ Full Color ] - > [ Black ] switching Fig. 25-10 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 231...
Page 968: Printing Status
Default setting of the color mode Check that the color mode of the equipment is set to one of [Black], [Full Color] and [Auto Color]. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 232...
Page 969: Setting
When the default setting of color modes is [Black] or [Full Color] When the default setting of color modes is [Auto Color] Fig. 25-11 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 233...
Page 970: Precautions For Setting
• When the “Color mode” is [Auto Color], black pages are printed only with toner K and thus only the toner K is consumed. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING MODE (08) 25 - 234...
Page 971: Error Code And Troubleshooting
Even in the cases other than the above, fully observe safety precautions. If any PC board or HDD shall be replaced, refer to“21.3Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board”. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING...
Page 972: Error Code List
2nd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 2nd P. 26-25 drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the 2nd drawer does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 2...
Page 973 PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 3...
Page 974 (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 4...
Page 975 Paper transport jam (Finisher paper punching edge P. 26-42 detection sensor): The paper position sensor on the Finisher transport path detects paper shorter than the acceptable paper size. [MJ-1101] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 5...
Page 976 [MJ-1101] Stack slider home position error: The stack slider is not at the home position. [MJ-1031] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 6...
Page 977 [MJ-1101] ED16 Finisher jam Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is P. 26-51 (Finisher section) not at the home position. [MJ-1101] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 7...
Page 978: Service Call
Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit) P. 26-100 C3B0 Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit) P. 26-100 C3B1 Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit) P. 26-100 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 8...
Page 979 Circuit related service Connection error between SLG board and SYS P. 26-65 call board CA00 Image control related color registration abnormality P. 26-87 service call © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 9...
Page 980 Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum P. 26-75 value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101] e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 10...
Page 981 Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew P. 26-81 adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 11...
Page 982 CE40 Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The P. 26-95 test pattern is not formed normally. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 12...
Page 983 P. 26-105 F350 Circuit related service SLG board abnormality P. 26-66 call F400 Circuit related service SYS board cooling fan abnormality P. 26-105 call © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 13...
Page 984: Error In Internet Fax / Scanning Function
Onramp Gateway transmission failure P. 26-107 1C82 Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received P. 26-108 1CC0 Job canceling 1CC1 Power failure P. 26-108 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 14...
Page 985 Insufficient system storage Terminal/Destination mail address P. 26-108 error (RFC: 552) 2553 Mailbox name not allowed Destination mail address error P. 26-108 (RFC: 553) © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 15...
Page 986: Error Code
2A40 System fatal error System error P. 26-110 2A50 Job canceling Job canceling 2A51 Power failure Power failure P. 26-110 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 16...
Page 987 Failed to process received Fax job Process failure of FAX job received P. 26-113 2CC0 Job canceled Job canceling 2CC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 26-113 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 17...
Page 988: Message Displayed In The Topaccess Screen
2DA7 Failed to acquire resource. Resource acquiring failure P. 26-113 2DC0 Job canceled Job canceling 2DC1 Power failure occurred Power failure P. 26-115 e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 18...
Page 989: The Received Mail
3B12 Format Error has been detected in P. 26-116 the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 19...
Page 990: The Received Mail. This Mail Has Been
3C32 Tiff Resolution Error has been P. 26-117 detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 20...
Page 991: Detected In The Received Mail
The mail could not be 3F10 P. 26-118 received until File I/O is recovered. 3F20 P. 26-118 3F30 P. 26-118 3F40 P. 26-118 © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 21...
Page 992: Printer Function Error
A2A2 Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one P. 26-120 specified with the department code. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 22...
Page 993 Color mode 0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale 6: Unused 7: Image smoothing © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 23...
Page 994: Diagnosis And Prescription For Each Error Code
8. Replace the ADU clutch. 9. Replace the LGC board. 10.Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 24...
Page 995 9. Replace the LGC board. 10.Check the 2nd drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 25...
Page 996 11. Replace the LGC board. 12.Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 26...
Page 997 10.Replace the LCF board. 11. Replace the LGC board. 12.Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING...
Page 998: Paper Transport Jam
10.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and replace them if they are worn out. 11. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 28...
Page 999 12.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and replace them if they are worn out. 13.Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING...
Page 1000 9. Replace the ADU clutch. 10.Replace the LGC board. 11. Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out. e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 30...
Page 1001 Correct if any. 4. Replace the registration sensor. 5. Replace the LGC board. 6. Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. © 2008, 2009 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 26 - 31...

This manual is also suitable for:

E-studio2820c E-studio4520c E-studio2830c E-studio3530c E-studio3520c

Toshiba e-STUDIO2330C Service Manual

Table of Contents

2 Specifications/Accessories/Options/Supplies

3 Outline of the Machine

30 Pc Boards

4 Copy Process

6 Control Panel

9 Laser Optical Unit

10 Drive System

11 Paper Feeding System

13 Developer Unit

14 Transfer Unit

15 Image Quality Control

18 Power Supply Unit

19 Preventive Maintenance (Pm)

20 Firmware Updating

21 Replacement of Pc Boards/Hdd

22 Backup Function

23 Self-Diagnostic Mode

24 Adjustment Mode (05)

26 Error Code and Troubleshooting

Quick Links

SERVICE MANUAL

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Toshiba e-STUDIO2330C

Summary of Contents for Toshiba e-STUDIO2330C